Collaborative Protection Profile for Network Devices

NIAP Logo
Version: 4.0
2025-11-25
National Information Assurance Partnership

Revision History

VersionDateComment
0.12014-09-05Draft published for Public review
0.22014-10-13Internal draft in response to public review comments, for iTC review
0.32014-10-17Draft version released to accompany CCDB review of Supporting Document.
0.42015-01-26Incorporated comments received from the CCDB review
1.02015-02-27Released for use
1.12016-07-21Updated draft published for public review
2.02017-05-05Released for use
2.12018-09-24Released for use
2.22019-12-20Released for use
2.2e2020-03-23Released for use
3.02023-04-06Incorporated comments received. Released for use
3.0e2023-12-06Released for use
4.02025-11-25Released for use

Contents

1Introduction1.1Overview1.2Terms1.2.1Common Criteria Terms1.2.2Technical Terms1.3Compliant Targets of Evaluation1.3.1TOE Boundary1.4TOE Features1.4.1Password-based remote administration1.4.2Password-based local authentication1.4.3Password-based authentication1.4.4Pre-shared keys for IPsec1.4.5Admin management of crypto keys1.4.6Local security admin1.4.7Distributed TOE1.5PP Overview1.6TOE Use Cases2Conformance Claims3Security Problem Description3.1Threats3.2Assumptions3.3Organizational Security Policies4Security Objectives4.1Security Objectives for the Operational Environment4.2Security Objectives Rationale5Security Requirements5.1Security Functional Requirements5.1.1Auditable Events for Mandatory SFRs5.1.2Security Audit (FAU)5.1.3Cryptographic Support (FCS)5.1.4Identification and Authentication (FIA)5.1.5Security Management (FMT)5.1.6Protection of the TSF (FPT)5.1.7TOE Access (FTA)5.1.8Trusted Channel (FTP_ITC)5.1.9TOE Security Functional Requirements Rationale5.2Security Assurance Requirements5.2.1Class ADV: Development5.2.2Class AGD: Guidance Documents5.2.3Class ALC: Life-cycle Support5.2.4Class ASE: ST Evaluation5.2.5Class ATE: Tests5.2.6Class AVA: Vulnerability AssessmentAppendix A - Optional RequirementsA.1Strictly Optional Requirements A.1.1Class ALC: Life-cycle SupportA.1.2Security Audit (FAU)A.1.3Communication (FCO)A.1.4Cryptographic Support (FCS)A.1.5Protection of the TSF (FPT)A.1.6Trusted Channel (FTP_ITC)A.2Objective Requirements A.3Implementation-dependent Requirements A.3.1Identification and Authentication (FIA)A.3.2Security Management (FMT)A.3.3Protection of the TSF (FPT)A.3.4TOE Access (FTA)Appendix B - Selection-based Requirements B.1Security Audit (FAU)B.2Cryptographic Support (FCS)B.3Security Management (FMT)B.4Protection of the TSF (FPT)Appendix C - Entropy Documentation and AssessmentAppendix D - GlossaryD.1TermsD.1.1Common Criteria TermsD.1.2Technical TermsAppendix E - AcronymsAppendix F - Bibliography

1 Introduction

1.1 Overview

This document is not an official version of the NDcPP. It was generated using the User Interface of the XML Builder tool to produce a NIAP XML Schema-compliant version of the NDcPP for use in automation tools. The use of this version of the NDcPP should be done in conjunction with the official published version of the NDcPP. Not all content is included in this version.

1.3 Compliant Targets of Evaluation

See published NDcPP document.

1.3.1 TOE Boundary

See published NDcPP document.

1.4 TOE Features

1.4.1 Password-based remote administration

If the TOE provides remote administration using a password-based authentication mechanism, certain SFRs in this PP must be included.

If this feature is implemented by the TOE, the following requirements must be claimed in the ST:

1.4.2 Password-based local authentication

If the TOE provides a password-based local authentication mechanism, certain SFRs in this PP must be included.

If this feature is implemented by the TOE, the following requirements must be claimed in the ST:

1.4.3 Password-based authentication

If the TOE provides a password-based authentication mechanism, certain SFRs in this PP must be included.

If this feature is implemented by the TOE, the following requirements must be claimed in the ST:

1.4.4 Pre-shared keys for IPsec

The TOE may support pre-shared keys for use in the IPsec protocol that conform to RFC 8784. If so, certain SFRs in this PP must be included.

If this feature is implemented by the TOE, the following requirements must be claimed in the ST:

1.4.5 Admin management of crypto keys

True if cryptographic keys can be managed (e.g., modified, deleted or generated/imported) by the Security Administrator.

If this feature is implemented by the TOE, the following requirements must be claimed in the ST:

1.4.6 Local security admin

True if the TOE provides the Security Administrator the ability to administer the TOE locally.

If this feature is implemented by the TOE, the following requirements must be claimed in the ST:

1.4.7 Distributed TOE

True if the TOE is implemented as a Distributed TOE as described in the Distributed TOE section of this cPP.

If this feature is implemented by the TOE, the following requirements must be claimed in the ST:

1.5 PP Overview

See published NDcPP document.

1.6 TOE Use Cases

See published NDcPP document.

2 Conformance Claims

Conformance Statement

An ST must claim exact conformance to this PP.

The evaluation methods used for evaluating the TOE are a combination of the workunits defined in [CEM] as well as the Evaluation Activities for ensuring that individual SFRs and SARs have a sufficient level of supporting evidence in the Security Target and guidance documentation and have been sufficiently tested by the laboratory as part of completing ATE_IND.1. Any functional packages this PP claims similarly contain their own Evaluation Activities that are used in this same manner.
CC Conformance Claims

This PP is conformant to Part 2 (conformant) and Part 3 (conformant) of Common Criteria CC:2022, Revision 1.
PP Claim

This PP does not claim conformance to any Protection Profile.

There are no PPs or PP-Modules that are allowed in a PP-Configuration with this PP.
Package Claim

The functional packages to which the PP conforms may include SFRs that are not mandatory to claim for the sake of conformance. An ST that claims one or more of these functional packages may include any non-mandatory SFRs that are appropriate to claim based on the capabilities of the TSF and on any triggers for their inclusion based inherently on the SFR selections made.
Additional Information

The PP-Modules that are allowed to specify this cPP as a PP-Module base are specified in the 'Allowed-with' PP-Modules list at https://nditc.github.io/AWL/NDcPP_allowed_with_list.html. The supporting document, "Evaluation Activities for Network Device cPP" must be used in conjunction with [CEM] when performing evaluations of an ST specifying this Network Device cPP. The supporting document defines the evaluation methods and activities for this cPP and has been developed in accordance with [CC4]. The supporting document can be found at https://github.com/ND-iTC/Documents.

3 Security Problem Description

A Network Device has a network infrastructure role that it is designed to provide. In doing so, the Network Device communicates with other Network Devices and other network entities (i.e. entities not defined as Network Devices because they do not have an infrastructure role) over the network. At the same time, it must provide a minimal set of common security functionality expected by all Network Devices. The security problem to be addressed by a compliant Network Device is defined as this set of common security functionality that addresses the threats that are common to Network Devices, as opposed to those that might be targeting the specific functionality of a specific type of Network Device. The set of common security functionality addresses communication with the Network Device, both authorized and unauthorized, the ability to perform valid and secure updates, the ability to audit device activity, the ability to securely store and utilize device and Administrator credentials and data, and the ability to self-test critical device components for failures.

3.1 Threats

The threats for the Network Device are grouped according to functional areas of the device in the sections below. The description of each threat is then followed by a rationale describing how it is addressed by the SFRs in Section 6, Annex A, and Annex B.

T.SECURITY_FUNCTIONALITY_COMPROMISE

Threat agents may compromise credentials and device data enabling continued access to the Network Device and its critical data. The compromise of credentials includes replacing existing credentials with an attacker’s credentials, modifying existing credentials, or obtaining the Administrator or device credentials for use by the attacker. Threat agents may also be able to take advantage of weak administrative passwords to gain privileged access to the device.

T.SECURITY_FUNCTIONALITY_FAILURE

An external, unauthorised entity could make use of failed or compromised security functionality and might therefore subsequently use or abuse security functions without prior authentication to access, change or modify device data, critical network traffic or security functionality of the device.

T.UNAUTHORISED_ADMINISTRATOR_ACCESS

Threat agents may attempt to gain Administrator access to the Network Device by nefarious means such as masquerading as an Administrator to the device, masquerading as the device to an Administrator, replaying an administrative session (in its entirety, or selected portions), or performing man-in-the-middle attacks, which would provide access to the administrative session, or sessions between Network Devices. Successfully gaining Administrator access allows malicious actions that compromise the security functionality of the device and the network on which it resides.

T.UNDETECTED_ACTIVITY

Threat agents may attempt to access, change, and/or modify the security functionality of the Network Device without Administrator awareness. This could result in the attacker finding an avenue (e.g., misconfiguration, flaw in the product) to compromise the device and the Administrator would have no knowledge that the device has been compromised.

T.UNTRUSTED_COMMUNICATIONS_CHANNELS

Threat agents may attempt to target Network Devices that do not use standardized secure tunnelling protocols to protect the critical network traffic. Attackers may take advantage of poorly designed protocols or poor key management to successfully perform man-in-the-middle attacks, replay attacks, etc. Successful attacks will result in loss of confidentiality and integrity of the critical network traffic and potentially could lead to a compromise of the Network Device itself.

T.UPDATE_COMPROMISE

Threat agents may attempt to provide a compromised update of the software or firmware which undermines the security functionality of the device. Non-validated updates or updates validated using non-secure or weak cryptography leave the update firmware vulnerable to surreptitious alteration.

T.WEAK_AUTHENTICATION_ENDPOINTS

Threat agents may take advantage of secure protocols that use weak methods to authenticate the endpoints, e.g., a shared password that is guessable or transported as plaintext. The consequences are the same as a poorly designed protocol, the attacker could masquerade as the Administrator or another device, and the attacker could insert themselves into the network stream and perform a man-in-the-middle attack. The result is the critical network traffic is exposed and there could be a loss of confidentiality and integrity, and potentially the Network Device itself could be compromised.

T.WEAK_CRYPTOGRAPHY

Threat agents may exploit weak cryptographic algorithms or perform an exhaustive search against a weak cryptographic key to gain access to critical security parameters or manipulate TSF data. Flawed or deprecated cryptographic algorithms, insecure modes of operation, predictable pseudorandom numbers, and too-small key sizes might allow attackers to compromise secure communications, gain unauthorised access, or allow to intercept and decrypt sensitive data.

3.2 Assumptions

This section describes the assumptions made in identification of the threats and security requirements for Network Devices. The Network Device is not expected to provide assurance in any of these areas, and as a result, requirements are not included to mitigate the threats associated.

A.ADMIN_CREDENTIALS_SECURE

The Administrator’s credentials (private keys) used to access the Network Device are protected by the platform on which they reside.

A.COMPONENTS_RUNNING (applies to distributed TOEs only)

For distributed TOEs, it is assumed that the availability of all TOE components is checked as appropriate to reduce the risk of an undetected attack on (or failure of) one or more TOE components. It is also assumed that in addition to the availability of all components it is also checked as appropriate that the audit functionality is running properly on all TOE components.

A.LIMITED_FUNCTIONALITY

The device is assumed to provide networking functionality as its core function. TOE administrators are assumed to treat the TOE as not being a general-purpose computing platform and will not attempt to install or execute any non-TOE software or enable functionality unrelated to the TOE’s networking purpose, regardless of whether the platform provides an interface that could technically permit such actions.

Note: For a virtual TOE evaluated as a pND, following Case 2 vNDs as specified in Section 1.2, the VS is considered part of the TOE with only one vND instance for each physical hardware platform. The exception being where components of a distributed TOE run inside more than one virtual machine (VM) on a single VS. In Case 2 vND, no non-TOE guest VMs are allowed on the platform.

A.NO_THRU_TRAFFIC_PROTECTION

A standard/generic Network Device does not provide any assurance regarding the protection of traffic that traverses it. The intent is for the Network Device to protect data that originates on or is destined to the device itself, to include administrative data and audit data.

Note: Traffic that is traversing the Network Device, destined for another network entity, is not covered by the ND cPP. Additional protection will be covered by cPPs and PP-Modules for particular types of Network Devices (e.g., firewall).

A.PHYSICAL_PROTECTION

The Network Device is assumed to be physically protected in its operational environment and not subject to physical attacks that compromise the security or interfere with the device’s physical interconnections and correct operation. This protection is assumed to be sufficient to protect the device and the data it contains. As a result, the cPP does not include any requirements on physical tamper protection or other physical attack mitigations. The cPP does not expect the product to defend against physical access to the device that allows unauthorised entities to extract data, bypass other controls, or otherwise manipulate the device. For vNDs, this assumption applies to the physical platform on which the VM runs.

A.REGULAR_UPDATES

The Network Device firmware and software is assumed to be updated by an Administrator on a regular basis in response to the release of product updates due to known vulnerabilities.

A.RESIDUAL_INFORMATION

The Administrator must ensure that there is no unauthorised access possible for sensitive residual information (e.g., cryptographic keys, keying material, PINs, passwords etc.) on networking equipment when the equipment is discarded or removed from its operational environment.

A.TRUSTED_ADMINISTRATOR

The Security Administrator(s) for the Network Device are assumed to be trusted and to act in the best interest of security for the organization. This includes appropriate training, following policy, and adhering to guidance documentation. Administrators are trusted to ensure passwords/credentials have sufficient strength and entropy and to lack malicious intent when administering the device. The Network Device is not expected to be capable of defending against a malicious Administrator that actively works to bypass or compromise the security of the device.

For TOEs supporting X.509v3 certificate-based authentication, the Security Administrator(s) are expected to fully validate (e.g., offline verification) any CA certificate (root CA certificate or intermediate CA certificate) loaded into the TOE’s trust store (aka 'root store', ' trusted CA Key Store', or similar) as a trust anchor prior to use (e.g., offline verification).

A.VS_CORRECT_CONFIGURATION (applies to vNDs only)

For vNDs, it is assumed that the VS and VMs are correctly configured to support ND functionality implemented in VMs.

A.VS_ISOLATION (applies to vNDs only)

For vNDs, it is assumed that the VS implements and is configured to provide the necessary mechanisms to isolate resources of all VMs running on the same platform. Both virtual and physical resources require access control. It is assumed the VS enforces access control to all physical and virtual resources in support of isolation. In particular, it is assumed the VS implements mechanisms to isolate all resources associated with virtual networks and to limit a VM’s access to only those virtual networks for which it has been configured. Furthermore, it is assumed that the VS adequately protects itself from software running inside VMs on the same platform.

A.VS_REGULAR_UPDATES (applies to vNDs only)

The VS software is assumed to be updated by the VS Administrator on a regular basis in response to the release of product updates due to known vulnerabilities.

A.VS_TRUSTED_ADMINISTRATOR (applies to vNDs only)

The Security Administrators for the VS are assumed to be trusted and to act in the best interest of security for the organization. This includes not interfering with the correct operation of the device. The Network Device is not expected to be capable of defending against a malicious VS Administrator that actively works to bypass or compromise the security of the device.

3.3 Organizational Security Policies

P.ACCESS_BANNER
The TOE shall display an initial banner describing restrictions of use, legal agreements, or any other appropriate information to which Administrators consent by accessing the TOE.

4 Security Objectives

4.1 Security Objectives for the Operational Environment

The following security objectives for the operational environment assist the OS in correctly providing its security functionality. These track with the assumptions about the environment.
OE.ADMIN_CREDENTIALS_SECURE

The Administrator’s credentials (private keys) used to access the TOE must be protected on any other platform on which they reside.

OE.COMPONENTS_RUNNING (applies to distributed TOEs only)

For distributed TOEs, the Security Administrator ensures that the availability of every TOE component is checked as appropriate to reduce the risk of an undetected attack on (or failure of) one or more TOE components. The Security Administrator also ensures that it is checked as appropriate for every TOE component that the audit functionality is running properly.

OE.NO_GENERAL_PURPOSE

There are no general-purpose computing capabilities (e.g., compilers or user applications) available on the TOE, other than those services necessary for the operation, administration and support of the TOE. Note: For vNDs the TOE includes only the contents of its own VM, and does not include other VMs or the VS.

OE.NO_THRU_TRAFFIC_PROTECTION

The TOE does not provide any protection of traffic that traverses it. It is assumed that protection of this traffic will be covered by other security and assurance measures in the operational environment.

OE.PHYSICAL

Physical security, commensurate with the value of the TOE and the data it contains, is provided by the environment.

OE.RESIDUAL_INFORMATION

The Security Administrator ensures that there is no unauthorised access possible for sensitive residual information (e.g., cryptographic keys, keying material, PINs, passwords etc.) on networking equipment when the equipment is discarded or removed from its operational environment. For vNDs, this applies when the physical platform on which the VM runs is removed from its operational environment.

OE.TRUSTED_ADMIN

Security Administrators are trusted to follow and apply all guidance documentation in a trusted manner. For vNDs, this includes the VS Administrator responsible for configuring the VMs that implement ND functionality.

For TOEs supporting X.509v3 certificate-based authentication, the Security Administrator is assumed to monitor the revocation status of all certificates in the TOE’s trust store and to remove any certificate from the TOE’s trust store in case such certificate can no longer be trusted.

OE.UPDATES

The TOE firmware and software are updated by an Administrator on a regular basis in response to the release of product updates due to known vulnerabilities.

OE.VM_CONFIGURATION (applies to vNDs only)

For vNDs, the Security Administrator ensures that the VS and VMs are configured to

  • reduce the attack surface of VMs as much as possible while supporting ND functionality (e.g., remove unnecessary virtual hardware, turn off unused interVM communications mechanisms), and

  • correctly implement ND functionality (e.g., ensure virtual networking is properly configured to support network traffic, management channels, and audit reporting).

The VS should be operated in a manner that reduces the likelihood that vND operations are adversely affected by virtualization features such as cloning, save/restore, suspend/resume, and live migration.

If possible, the VS should be configured to make use of features that leverage the VS’s privileged position to provide additional security functionality. Such features could include malware detection through VM introspection, measured VM boot, or VM snapshot for forensic analysis.

4.2 Security Objectives Rationale

This section describes how the assumptions and organizational security policies map to operational environment security objectives.
Table 1: Security Objectives Rationale
Assumption or OSPSecurity ObjectivesRationale
A.ADMIN_​CREDENTIALS_​SECUREOE.ADMIN_​CREDENTIALS_​SECURE
A.COMPONENTS_​RUNNING (applies to distributed TOEs only)OE.COMPONENTS_​RUNNING (applies to distributed TOEs only)
A.LIMITED_​FUNCTIONALITYOE.NO_​GENERAL_​PURPOSE
A.NO_​THRU_​TRAFFIC_​PROTECTIONOE.NO_​THRU_​TRAFFIC_​PROTECTION
A.PHYSICAL_​PROTECTIONOE.PHYSICAL
A.REGULAR_​UPDATESOE.UPDATES
A.RESIDUAL_​INFORMATIONOE.RESIDUAL_​INFORMATION
A.TRUSTED_​ADMINISTRATOROE.TRUSTED_​ADMIN
A.VS_​CORRECT_​CONFIGURATION (applies to vNDs only)OE.VM_​CONFIGURATION (applies to vNDs only)
A.VS_​ISOLATION (applies to vNDs only)OE.VM_​CONFIGURATION (applies to vNDs only)
A.VS_​REGULAR_​UPDATES (applies to vNDs only)OE.UPDATES
A.VS_​TRUSTED_​ADMINISTRATOR (applies to vNDs only)OE.TRUSTED_​ADMIN

5 Security Requirements

This chapter describes the security requirements which have to be fulfilled by the product under evaluation. Those requirements comprise functional components from Part 2 and assurance components from Part 3 of [CC]. The following conventions are used for the completion of operations:

5.1 Security Functional Requirements

5.1.1 Auditable Events for Mandatory SFRs

Table 2: Auditable Events for Mandatory Requirements
RequirementAuditable EventsAdditional Audit Record Contents
FAU_GEN.1
No events specifiedN/A
FAU_GEN.2
No events specifiedN/A
FAU_STG_EXT.1
Configuration of local audit settings.Identity of account making changes to the audit configuration.
FCS_CKM.1/AKG
No events specifiedN/A
FCS_CKM.6
No events specifiedN/A
FCS_CKM_EXT.7
No events specifiedN/A
FCS_COP.1/DataEncryption
No events specifiedN/A
FCS_COP.1/Hash
No events specifiedN/A
FCS_COP.1/KeyedHash
No events specifiedN/A
FCS_COP.1/SigGen
No events specifiedN/A
FCS_RBG.1
No events specifiedN/A
FIA_UIA_EXT.1
All use of identification and authentication mechanisms.Origin of the attempt (e.g., IP address).
FMT_MOF.1/ManualUpdate
Any attempt to initiate a manual update. No additional information
FMT_MTD.1/CoreData
No events specifiedN/A
FMT_SMF.1
All management activities of TSF data. No additional information
FMT_SMR.2
No events specifiedN/A
FPT_SKP_EXT.1
No events specifiedN/A
FPT_STM_EXT.1
Discontinuous changes to time - either Administrator actuated or changed via an automated process. (Note: No continuous changes to time need to be logged. See also application note on FPT_STM_EXT.1)For discontinuous changes to time: The old and new values for the time. Origin of the attempt to change time for success and failure (e.g., IP address).
FPT_TST_EXT.1
No events specifiedN/A
FPT_TUD_EXT.1
Initiation of update; result of the update attempt (success or failure). No additional information
FTA_SSL.3
The termination of a remote session by the session locking mechanism. No additional information
FTA_SSL.4
The termination of an interactive session. No additional information
FTA_TAB.1
No events specifiedN/A
FTP_ITC.1
Initiation of the trusted channel. No additional information
Termination of the trusted channel. No additional information
Failure of the trusted channel functions.Reason for failure
FTP_TRP.1/Admin
Initiation of the trusted path. No additional information
Termination of the trusted path. No additional information
Failure of the trusted path functions.Reason for failure.

5.1.2 Security Audit (FAU)

FAU_GEN.1 Audit data generation

The TSF shall be able to generate audit data of the following auditable events:
  1. Start-up and shut-down of the audit functions;

  2. All auditable events for the not specified level of audit; and

  3. All administrative actions comprising:

    1. Administrative login and logout (name of Administrator account shall be logged if individual accounts are required for Administrators).

    2. Changes to TSF data related to configuration changes (in addition to the information that a change occurred it shall be logged what has been changed).

    3. Generating/import of, changing, or deleting of cryptographic keys (in addition to the action itself a unique key name or key reference shall be logged).

    4. [selection: Resetting passwords (name of related Administrator account shall be logged), no other actions, [assignment: list of other uses of privileges]];
  1. Specifically defined auditable events listed in Table 2.

Application Note:

Application Note 1

If the list of ‘administrative actions’ appears to be incomplete, the assignment in the selection should be used to list additional administrative actions which are audited.

The requirement to audit the "Generating/import of, changing, or deleting of cryptographic keys" refers to all types of cryptographic keys which are intended to be used longer than for just one session (i.e., it does not refer to ephemeral keys/session keys). The requirement applies to all named changes independently from how they are invoked. A cryptographic key could be generated automatically during initial start-up without administrator intervention or through administrator intervention. This requirement also applies to the management of cryptographic keys by adding, replacing or removing trust anchors in the TOE’s trust store. In all related cases the changes to cryptographic keys need to be audited together with a unique key name, key reference or unique identifier for the corresponding certificate.

The ST author replaces the cross-reference to the table of audit events with an appropriate cross-reference for the ST.

For distributed TOEs, each component must generate an audit record for each of the SFRs that it implements. If more than one TOE component is involved when an audit event is triggered, the event has to be audited on each component (e.g., rejection of a connection by one component while attempting to establish a secure communication channel between two components should result in an audit event being generated by both components). This is not limited to error cases but also includes events about successful actions like successful build up/tear down of a secure communication channel between TOE components.

Application Note 2

The ST author can include other auditable events directly in the table; they are not limited to the list presented.

The audit events that correspond to defined management functions are highly dependent on the FMT_SMF.1 selections. Therefore, there is only a generic requirement specified in Table 2 for FMT_SMF.1 ('All management activities of TSF data.') that is intended to cover all mandatory and selection-based management functions. If, for example, the ‘Ability to enable or disable automatic checking for updates or automatic updates’ is selected as part of FMT_SMF.1, all actions of enabling or disabling automatic checking for updates or automatic updates should be audited. Audit of management functions is intended to record both the issuing and the result of the command/administrative action. The corresponding audit event can be recorded as either a single audit record or multiple audit records. In cases where a management function could conceivably fail, such as updating the TOE, there must exist an audit record indicating the outcome, such as the successful completion of the update process.

With respect to FAU_GEN.1.1, FMT_SMF.1 and FMT_MOF.1/Services the term ‘services’ refers to trusted path and trusted channel communications, on demand self-tests, trusted update and Administrator sessions (that exist under the trusted path) (e.g., netconf).

The TSF shall record within the audit data at least the following information:

  1. Date and time of the auditable event, type of event, subject identity (if applicable), and the outcome (success or failure) of the event; and

  2. For each auditable event type, based on the auditable event definitions of the functional components included in the cPP, PP-Module, functional package or ST, information specified in column three of Table 2.

Application Note:

Application Note 3

The ST author replaces the cross-reference to the table of audit events with an appropriate cross-reference for the ST. If the TOE does not implement functionality that enables the administrator to configure local audit settings, then item FAU_STG_EXT.1 in Table 2 should be considered ‘trivially satisfied’ and the ST author should include an explanation that the local audit is not configurable in the TSS.

The date and time information for any audit event should be recorded as part of each audit record to ensure the timing of the event can be unambiguously determined from the data contained in the audit record. The representation of date and time information recorded for each event needs to allow unambiguous determination of at least day, month and year information for the date and hours, minutes and second information for the time.

Application Note 4

Additional audit events will apply to the TOE depending on the optional and selection-based requirements adopted from Annex A, Annex B, PP-Module(s), and functional package(s). For all SFRs included in the ST, the ST must include the relevant additional auditable events specified in Table 10 for optional SFRs, Table 11 for selection-based SFRs, the claimed PP-Module(s), and the claimed functional package(s). All audit events defined in Table 2 have to be included in the ST as they are mandatory.

  1. The main reasons for collecting audit information are to detect and identify error conditions, security violations, etc. and to provide sufficient information to the Security Administrator to resolve the issue. The audit information to be collected according to FAU_GEN.1, and the failure conditions identified in tables 2, 11, and 12 need to enable the Security Administrator at least to detect and identify the problem and provide at least basic information to resolve the issue. Also for this level of detail, the other FAU requirements apply, in particular the need for local and remote storage of audit information according to FAU_STG_EXT.1.

  2. The level of detail that needs to be provided to the Security Administrator to actually resolve an issue usually depends on the complexity of the underlying use case. It is expected that a product provides additional levels of auditing to support resolution of error conditions, security violations, etc. beyond the level required by FAU_GEN.1, but it should also be clear that a high level of granularity cannot be maintained on most systems by default due to the high number of audit events that would be generated in such a configuration. It is expected that the TOE will be capable of auditing sufficient information to meet the requirements of FAU_GEN.1. If the TOE allows configuration of the level of auditing without taking the TOE out of the evaluated configuration, some of the audit events required by FAU_GEN.1 may only be recorded after corresponding configuration of the audit functionality.

  3. The issue described above explicitly refers to the use of X.509v3 certificates. In the case that a certificate-based authentication fails, an error message telling the Security Administrator that ‘something is wrong with the certificate’ shall not be considered as sufficient information about the ‘reason for failure’ as a basic information to resolve the issue. The log message will inform the Security Administrator of at least the following:

  • ‘Trust issue’ with the certificate, e.g., due to failed path validation

  • Use of an ‘expired certificate’

  • Absence of the basicConstraints extension o The CA flag is not set for a certificate presented as a CA

  • Signature validation failure for any certificate in the certificate path; failure to establish revocation status; revoked certificate

  1. As such for audit information related to the use of X.509v3 certificates, that it uniquely identifies the certificate that could not be successfully verified. For example, identification of a certificate could include Key Subject and Key ID (where Key Subject is an identifier contained in the CN or SAN and where Key ID is a certificate’s serial number and issuer name) or Subject Key Identifier (SKI) and Authority Key Identifier (AKI). In general, when using open source libraries like OpenSSL, passing on error messages from such libraries to the Security Administrator is regarded as good practice.

  1. For the administrative task of generating/import of, changing, or deleting of cryptographic keys as defined in FAU_GEN.1.1c, the TSS shall identify what information is logged to identify the relevant key.

  2. For distributed TOEs, the evaluator shall examine the TSS to ensure that it describes which of the overall required auditable events defined in FAU_GEN.1.1 are generated and recorded by which TOE components. The evaluator shall ensure that this mapping of audit events to TOE components accounts for, and is consistent with, information provided in Table 1, as well as events in Tables 2, 11, and 12 (where applicable to the overall TOE). This includes that the evaluator shall confirm that all components defined as generating audit information for a particular SFR should also contribute to that SFR as defined in the mapping of SFRs to TOE components, and that the audit records generated by each component cover all the SFRs that it implements.

Guidance
  1. The evaluator shall check the guidance documentation and ensure that it provides an example of each auditable event required by FAU_GEN.1 (i.e., at least one instance of each auditable event, comprising the mandatory, optional and selection-based SFR sections as applicable, shall be provided from the actual audit record).

  2. The evaluator shall also make a determination of the administrative actions related to TSF data related to configuration changes. The evaluator shall examine the guidance documentation and make a determination of which administrative commands, including subcommands, scripts, and configuration files, are related to the configuration (including enabling or disabling) of the mechanisms implemented in the TOE that are necessary to enforce the requirements specified in the cPP. The evaluator shall document the methodology or approach taken while determining which actions in the administrative guide are related to TSF data related to configuration changes. The evaluator may perform this activity as part of the activities associated with ensuring that the corresponding guidance documentation satisfies the requirements related to it.

Tests
  1. The evaluator shall test the TOE’s ability to correctly generate audit records by having the TOE generate audit records for the events listed in the table of audit events and the administrative actions listed above. This should include all instances of an event; for instance, if there are several different Identity and Authentication (I&A) mechanisms for a system, the FIA_UIA_EXT.1 events must be generated for each mechanism. The evaluator shall test that audit records are generated for the establishment and termination of a channel for each of the cryptographic protocols contained in the ST. If HTTPS is implemented, the test demonstrating the establishment and termination of a TLS session can be combined with the test for an HTTPS session. When verifying the test results, the evaluator shall ensure the audit records generated during testing match the format specified in the guidance documentation, and that the fields in each audit record have the proper entries.

  2. For distributed TOEs, the evaluator shall perform tests on all TOE components according to the mapping of auditable events to TOE components in the Security Target. For all events involving more than one TOE component when an audit event is triggered, the evaluator has to check that the event has been audited on both sides (e.g., failure of building up a secure communication channel between the two components). This is not limited to error cases but includes also events about successful actions like successful build up/tear down of a secure communication channel between TOE components.

  3. Note that the testing here can be accomplished in conjunction with the testing of the security mechanisms directly.

FAU_GEN.2 User identity association

For audit events resulting from actions of identified users, the TSF shall be able to associate each auditable event with the identity of the user that caused the event.
Application Note:

Application Note 5

Where an auditable event is triggered by another component, the component that records the event must associate the event with the identity of the initiating component that caused the event (applies to distributed TOEs only).

  1. The TSS requirements for FAU_GEN.2 are already covered by the TSS requirements for FAU_GEN.1.

Guidance

The Guidance Documentation requirements for FAU_GEN.2 are already covered by the Guidance Documentation requirements for FAU_GEN.1.

Tests
  1. This activity should be accomplished in conjunction with the testing of FAU_GEN.1.1.

  2. For distributed TOEs, the evaluator shall verify that where auditable events are instigated by another component, the component that records the event associates the event with the identity of the instigator. The evaluator shall perform at least one test on one component where another component instigates an auditable event. The evaluator shall verify that the event is recorded by the component as expected and the event is associated with the instigating component. It is assumed that an event instigated by another component can at least be generated for building up a secure channel between two TOE components. If for some reason (could be e.g., TSS or Guidance Documentation) the evaluator would come to the conclusion that the overall TOE does not generate any events instigated by other components, then this requirement shall be omitted.

FAU_STG_EXT.1 Protected Audit Event Storage

The TSF shall be able to transmit the generated audit data to an external IT entity using a trusted channel according to FTP_ITC.1.
Application Note:

Application Note 6

For selecting the option of transmission of generated audit data to an external IT entity the TOE relies on a non-TOE audit server for storage and review of audit records. The storage of these audit records and the ability to allow the Administrator to review these audit records is provided by the operational environment in that case. Since the external audit server is not part of the TOE, there are no requirements on it except the capabilities for FTP_ITC.1 transport for audit data. No requirements are placed upon the format or underlying protocol of the audit data being transferred. The TOE must be capable of being configured to transfer audit data to an external IT entity without Administrator intervention. Manual transfer would not meet the requirements. Transmission could be done in real-time or periodically. If the transmission is not done in real-time then the TSS describes what event stimulates the transmission to be made and what range of frequencies the TOE supports for making transfers of audit data to the audit server, the TSS also suggests typical acceptable frequencies for the transfer.

For distributed TOEs, each component must be able to export audit data across a protected channel external (FTP_ITC.1) or intercomponent (FPT_ITT.1 or FTP_ITC.1) as appropriate. At least one component of the TOE must be able to export audit records via FTP_ITC.1 such that all TOE audit records can be exported to an external IT entity.

An ‘external IT entity’ (physical or virtualized) is another device or computer on the network in which the TOE no longer has access to the audit records. This can be a physical or virtualized entity.

The TSF shall be able to store generated audit data on the TOE itself. In addition

[selection: The TOE shall consist of a single standalone component that stores audit data locally, The TOE shall be a distributed TOE that stores audit data on the following TOE components: [assignment: identification of TOE components], The TOE shall be a distributed TOE with storage of audit data provided externally for the following TOE components: [assignment: list of TOE components that do not store audit data locally and the other TOE components to which they transmit their generated audit data]]
Application Note:

Application Note 7

If the TOE is a standalone TOE (i.e., not a distributed TOE) the option 'The TOE should consist of a single standalone component that stores audit data locally' must be selected.

If the TOE is a distributed TOE, the option 'The TOE should be a distributed TOE that stores audit data on the following TOE components: [assignment: identification of TOE components]' must be selected and the TOE components which store audit data locally must be listed in the assignment. Since all TOEs are required to provide functions to store audit data locally this option needs to be selected for all distributed TOEs. In addition, FAU_GEN_EXT.1 and FAU_STG_EXT.4 must be claimed in the ST. If the distributed TOE consists only of components which are storing audit data locally, it is sufficient to select only the option 'The TOE should be a distributed TOE that stores audit data on the following TOE components: [assignment: identification of TOE components]' and add FAU_GEN_EXT.1 and FAU_STG_EXT.4.

If the TOE is a distributed TOE and some TOE components are not storing audit data locally, the option 'The TOE should be a distributed TOE with storage of audit data provided externally for the following TOE components: [assignment: list of TOE components that do not store audit data locally and the other TOE components to which they transmit their generated audit data]' must be selected in addition to the option 'The TOE should be a distributed TOE that stores audit data on the following TOE components: [assignment: identification of TOE components]'. In that case FAU_STG_EXT.5 must be claimed in the ST in addition to FAU_GEN_EXT.1 and FAU_STG_EXT.4. For the option 'The TOE should be a distributed TOE with storage of audit data provided externally for the following TOE components: [assignment: list of TOE components that do not store audit data locally and the other TOE components to which they transmit their generated audit data]' the TOE components that do not store audit data locally should be mapped to the TOE components to which they transmit their generated audit data.

For distributed TOEs, this SFR can be fulfilled either by every TOE component storing its own security audit data locally or by one or more TOE components storing audit data locally and other TOE components which are not storing audit information locally sending security audit data to other TOE components for local storage. For the transfer of security audit data between TOE components a protected channel according to FTP_ITC.1 or FPT_ITT.1 must be used. The TSS describes which TOE components store security audit data locally and which TOE components do not store security audit data locally. For the latter, the TSS describes which other TOE component the audit data is stored locally.

For pNDs, ‘on the TOE itself’ or ‘locally’ means on storage inside or directly attached to the ND chassis and accessible by the networking functionality.

For vNDs, local storage is any storage accessible by TOE software. In a virtualized environment, ‘local’ storage is under the control of the VS and may be physically located on the local host, but it could also be located on a network drive or storage array.

The TSF shall maintain a [selection: log file, database, buffer, [assignment: other local logging method]] of audit records in the event that an interruption of communication with the remote audit server occurs.
The TSF shall be able to store [selection: persistent, non-persistent] audit records locally with a minimum storage size of [assignment: number of records and/or file/buffer size(s)]
Application Note:

Application Note 8

Persistent logging is defined as any record(s) that is retained through power off, power failure, or reboot. This requirement allows for the TSF to implement logging either persistent log records or non-persistent log records that may be cleared on reboot of the TOE.

The TSF shall [selection: drop new audit data, overwrite previous audit records according to the following rule: [assignment: rule for overwriting previous audit records], [assignment: other action]] when the local storage space for audit data is full.
Application Note:

Application Note 9

The ST author may use the "other action" assignment to describe other measurable behaviour (e.g., frequency of log file rotation based on size and/or age of log files).

For distributed TOEs, each component is not required to store generated audit data locally, but the overall TOE needs to be able to store audit data locally. Each component must at least provide the ability to temporarily buffer audit information locally to ensure that audit records are preserved in case of network connectivity issues. Buffering audit information locally, does not necessarily involve non-volatile memory: audit information could be buffered in volatile memory. However, the local storage of audit information in the sense of FAU_STG_EXT.1.5 needs to be done in non-volatile memory. For every component which performs local storage of audit information, the behaviour when local storage is exhausted needs to be described. For every component which is buffering audit information instead of storing audit information locally itself, it needs to be described what happens in case the buffer space is exhausted.

The TSF shall provide the following mechanisms for administrative access to locally stored audit records [selection: none, manual export, ability to view locally].
Application Note:

Application Note 10

If "ability to view locally" is selected in FAU_STG_EXT.1.6, then FAU_SAR.1 from Annex B must be included in the ST.

34. The evaluator shall examine the TSS to ensure it describes the means by which the audit data are transferred to the external audit server, and how the trusted channel is provided.

35. The evaluator shall examine the TSS to ensure it describes whether the TOE is a standalone TOE that stores audit data locally or a distributed TOE that stores audit data locally on each TOE component or a distributed TOE that contains TOE components that cannot store audit data locally on themselves but need to transfer audit data to other TOE components that can store audit data locally. The evaluator shall examine the TSS to ensure that for distributed TOEs it contains a list of TOE components that store audit data locally. The evaluator shall examine the TSS to ensure that for distributed TOEs that contain components which do not store audit data locally but transmit their generated audit data to other components it contains a mapping between the transmitting and storing TOE components.

36. The evaluator shall examine the TSS to ensure that it details whether the transmission of audit data to an external IT entity can be done in real-time, periodically, or both. In the case where the TOE is capable of performing transmission periodically, the evaluator shall verify that the TSS provides details about what event stimulates the transmission to be made as well as the possible acceptable frequency for the transfer of audit data.

37. For distributed TOEs, the evaluator shall examine the TSS to ensure it describes to which TOE components this SFR applies and how audit data transfer to the external audit server is implemented among the different TOE components (e.g., every TOE component does its own transfer or the data is sent to another TOE component for central transfer of all audit events to the external audit server).

38. The evaluator shall examine the TSS to ensure it describes the amount of audit data that can be stored locally and how these records are protected against unauthorised modification or deletion.

39. The evaluator shall examine the TSS to ensure it describes the method implemented for local logging, including format (e.g., buffer, log file, database) and whether the logs are persistent or non-persistent.

40. The evaluator shall examine the TSS to ensure it describes the conditions that must be met for authorised deletion of audit records.

41. The evaluator shall examine the TSS to ensure it details the behaviour of the TOE when the storage space for audit data is full. When the option ‘overwrite previous audit record’ is selected this description should include an outline of the rule for overwriting audit data. If ‘other actions’ are chosen such as sending the new audit data to an external IT entity, then the related behaviour of the TOE shall also be detailed in the TSS.

42. For distributed TOEs, the evaluator shall examine the TSS to ensure it describes which TOE components are storing audit information locally and which components are buffering audit information and forwarding the information to another TOE component for local storage. For every component the TSS shall describe the behaviour when local storage space or buffer space is exhausted.

Guidance

43. The evaluator shall also examine the guidance documentation to ensure it describes how to establish the trusted channel to the audit server, as well as describe any requirements on the audit server (particular audit server protocol, version of the protocol required, etc.), as well as configuration of the TOE needed to communicate with the audit server.

44. The evaluator shall also examine the guidance documentation to ensure it describes the relationship between the local audit data and the audit data that are sent to the audit log server. For example, when an audit event is generated, is it simultaneously sent to the external server and the local store, or is the local store used as a buffer and “cleared” periodically by sending the data to the audit server.

45. The evaluator shall examine the guidance documentation to ensure it describes any configuration required for protection of the locally stored audit data against unauthorised modification or deletion.

46. If the storage size is configurable, the evaluator shall review the Guidance Documentation to ensure it contains instructions on specifying the required parameters.

47. If more than one selection is made for FAU_STG_EXT.1.5, the evaluator shall review the Guidance Documentation to ensure it contains instructions on specifying which action is performed when the local storage space is full.

Tests
48. Testing of secure transmission of the audit data externally (FTP_ITC.1) and, where applicable, intercomponent (FPT_ITT.1 or FTP_ITC.1) shall be performed according to the assurance activities for the particular protocol(s).

49. The evaluator shall perform the following additional test for this requirement:






  • Test FAU_STG_EXT.1:1:

    The evaluator shall establish a session between the TOE and the audit server according to the configuration guidance provided. The evaluator shall then examine the traffic that passes between the audit server and the TOE during several activities of the evaluator’s choice designed to generate audit data to be transferred to the audit server. The evaluator shall observe that these data are not able to be viewed in the clear during this transfer, and that they are successfully received by the audit server. The evaluator shall record the particular software (name, version) used on the audit server during testing. The evaluator shall verify that the TOE is capable of transferring audit data to an external audit server automatically without administrator intervention.

  • The following content should be included if:
    • the TOE implements "Distributed TOE"

    For distributed TOEs, Test 1 defined above shall be applicable to all TOE components that forward audit data to an external audit server.

  • Test FAU_STG_EXT.1:2:

    The evaluator shall perform operations that generate audit data and verify that this data is stored locally. The evaluator shall then make note of whether the TSS claims persistent or non-persistent logging and perform one of the following actions:

    1. If persistent logging is selected, the evaluator shall perform a power cycle of the TOE and ensure that following power on operations the log events generated are still maintained within the local audit storage.

    2. If non-persistent logging is selected, the evaluator shall perform a power cycle of the TOE and ensure that following power on operations the log events generated are no longer present within the local audit storage.

  • Test FAU_STG_EXT.1:3:

    The evaluator shall perform operations that generate audit data until the local storage space is exceeded and verifies that the TOE complies with the behaviour defined in FAU_STG_EXT.1.5. Depending on the configuration this means that the evaluator shall check the content of the audit data when the audit data is just filled to the maximum and then verifies that:

    1. The audit data remains unchanged with every new auditable event that should be tracked but that the audit data is recorded again after the local storage for audit data is cleared (for the option ‘drop new audit data’ in FAU_STG_EXT.1.5).

    2. The existing audit data is overwritten with every new auditable event that should be tracked according to the specified rule (for the option ‘overwrite previous audit records’ in FAU_STG_EXT.1.5)

    3. The TOE behaves as specified (for the option ‘other action’ in FAU_STG_EXT.1.5).

    71f55177-ba90-4ca2-ac4d-ae73c946de53
    1. The audit data remains unchanged with every new auditable event that should be tracked but that the audit data is recorded again after the local storage for audit data is cleared.

    The existing audit data is overwritten with every new auditable event that should be tracked according to the specified rule (for the option ‘overwrite previous audit records’ in FAU_STG_EXT.1.5)

    The TOE behaves as specified (for the option ‘other action’ in FAU_STG_EXT.1.5).

    • The following content should be included if:
      • the TOE implements "Distributed TOE"

      For distributed TOEs, for the local storage according to FAU_STG_EXT.1.4, Test 1 specified above shall be applied to all TOE components that store audit data locally. For all TOE components that store audit data locally and comply with FAU_STG_EXT.2, Test 2 specified above shall be applied. The evaluator shall verify that the transfer of audit data to an external audit server is implemented.

      The following content should be included if:

      [Conditional]: In case manual export or ability to view locally is selected in FAU_STG_EXT.1.6, during interruption the evaluator shall perform a TSF-mediated action and verify the event is recorded in the audit trail.

      Note: The intent of the test is to ensure that the local audit TSF (as specified by FAU_STG_EXT.1.3) operates independently from the ability to transmit the generated audit data to an external audit server (as specified in FAU_STG_EXT.1.1). There are no specific requirements on the interruption of the connection between the TOE and the external audit server (as for FTP_ITC.1).

    5.1.3 Cryptographic Support (FCS)

    FCS_CKM.1/AKG Cryptographic Key Generation - Asymmetric Key

    The TSF shall generate asymmetric cryptographic keys in accordance with a specified cryptographic key generation algorithm:

    [selection: Cryptographic Key Generation Algorithm] and specified cryptographic algorithm parameters [selection: Cryptographic Algorithm Parameters] that meet the following: [selection: List of Standards] . The following table provides the allowed choices for completion of the selection operations of FCS_CKM.1.1/AKG.
    Table 3: Allowed choices for FCS_CKM.1.1/AKG
    Identifier Cryptographic Key Generation Algorithm Cryptographic Algorithm Parameters List of Standards
    RSARSAModulus of size [selection: 2048, 3072, 4096, 6144, 8192] bitsNIST FIPS PUB 186-5 (Section A.1.1)
    ECC-ERBECC-ERB - Extra Random BitsElliptic Curve [selection: P-256, P-384, P-521]NIST FIPS PUB 186-5 (Section A.2.1), NIST SP 800-186 (Section 3) [NIST Curves]
    ECC-RSECC-RS - Rejection SamplingElliptic Curve [selection: P-256, P-384, P-521]NIST FIPS PUB 186-5 (Section A.2.2), NIST SP 800-186 (Section 3) [NIST Curves]
    FFC-ERBFFC-ERB - Extra Random BitsStatic domain parameters approved for [selection:
    • IKE Groups [selection: MODP-2048, MODP-3072, MODP-4096, MODP-6144, MODP-8192]
    • TLS Groups [selection: ffdhe-2048, ffdhe-3072, ffdhe-4096, ffdhe-6144, ffdhe-8192]
    ]
    NIST SP 800-56A Revision 3 (Section 5.6.1.1.3), [selection: RFC 3526 [IKE groups], RFC 7919 [TLS groups]]
    FCC-RSFCC-RS - Extra Random BitsStatic domain parameters approved for [selection:
    • IKE Groups [selection: MODP-2048, MODP-3072, MODP-4096, MODP-6144, MODP-8192]
    • TLS Groups [selection: ffdhe-2048, ffdhe-3072, ffdhe-4096, ffdhe-6144, ffdhe-8192]
    ]
    NIST SP 800-56A Revision 3 (Section 5.6.1.1.3), [selection: RFC 3526 [IKE groups], RFC 7919 [TLS groups]]
    LMSLMSprivate key size [selection:
    • 192 bits with [selection: SHA-256/192, SHAKE256/192]
    • 256 bits with [selection: SHA-256, SHAKE256]
    ] Winternitz parameter = [selection: 1, 2, 4, 8],Tree height = [selection: 5, 10, 15, 20, 25]
    RFC 8554 [LMS], NIST SP 800-208 [parameters]
    XMSSXMSSprivate key size [selection:
    • 192 bits with [selection: SHA-256/192, SHAKE256/192]
    • 256 bits with [selection: SHA-256, SHAKE256]
    ] Tree height = [selection: 10, 16, 20]
    RFC 8391 [XMSS], NIST SP 800-208 [parameters]
    ML-KEMML-KEMParameter set = ML-KEM-1024NIST FIPS PUB 203
    ML-DSAML-DSAParameter set = ML-DSA-87NIST FIPS PUB 204
    Application Note:

    Application Note 11

    The ST author selects all key generation algorithms used for key agreement (including generation of ephemeral keys) and device authentication.

    For RSA the choice of the modulus implies the resulting key sizes of the public and private keys generated using the specified standard methods.

    When generating ECC keys pairs for key agreement and if “ECDH” is claimed in FCS_CKM_EXT.7, then “ECC–ERB” or “ECC–RS” must be claimed. The sizes of the private key, which is a scalar, and the public key, which is a point on the elliptic curve, are determined by the choice of the curve.

    For Finite Field Cryptography (FFC), “FFC-ERB” or “FFC–RS” may be claimed only for generating private and public keys when “DH” is claimed in FCS_CKM_EXT.7.

    The MODP Diffie-Hellman groups do not necessarily adhere to the protocol restrictions specified as IKE groups. MODP Diffie-Hellman groups may also be used in other protocols such as TLS 1.2.

    When generating ECC key pairs for digital signature generation and if “ECDSA” is claimed in FCS_COP.1/SigGen, then “ECC–ERB” or “ECC–RS” must be claimed. The sizes of the private key, which is a scalar, and the public key, which is a point on the elliptic curve, are determined by the choice of the curve.

    When key generation is used for device authentication, other than non-X.509 SSH authentication algorithm, the public key is expected to be associated with an X.509v3 certificate.

    50. The evaluator shall examine the TSS to verify that it describes how the TOE generates a key based on output from a random bit generator as specified in FCS_RBG.1. The evaluator shall review the TSS to verify that it describes how the functionality described by FCS_RBG.1 is invoked.

    51. The evaluator shall examine the TSS to verify that it identifies the usage and key lifecycle for keys generated using each selected algorithm.

    52. The evaluator shall examine the TSS to verify that any one-time values such as nonces or masks are constructed in accordance with the relevant standards.

    53. If the TOE uses the generated key in a key chain or hierarchy then the evaluator shall verify that the TSS describes how the key is used as part of the key chain or hierarchy.

    Guidance

    54. The evaluator shall verify that the Guidance instructs the administrator how to configure the TOE to generate keys for the selected key generation algorithms for all key types and uses identified in the TSS.

    Tests

    55. The following tests are conditional based on the selections made in the SFR. The evaluator shall perform the following tests or witness respective tests executed by the developer. The tests must be executed on a platform that is as close as practically possible to the operational platform (but which may be instrumented in terms of, for example, use of a debug mode). Where the test is not carried out on the TOE itself, the test platform shall be identified and the differences between test environment and TOE execution environment shall be described.














    • Test FCS_CKM.1/AKG:1:

      RSA Key Generation

      56. FIPS PUB 186-5 Key Pair generation specifies five methods for generating the primes p and q. These are:

      1. Random provable primes

      2. Random probable primes

      3. Provable primes with conditions based on auxiliary provable primes

      4. Probable primes with conditions based on auxiliary provable primes

      5. Probable primes with conditions based on auxiliary probable primes

      In addition to the key generation method, the input parameters are:

      • Modulus [3072, 4096, 6144, 8192]

      • Hash algorithm [SHA-384, SHA-512] (methods 1, 3, 4 only)

      • Rabin-Miller prime test [2100, 2Security String] (methods 2, 4, 5 only)

      • p mod 8 value [0,1,3,5,7]

      • q mod 8 value [0,1,3,5,7]

      • Private key format [standard, Chinese Remainder Theorem]

      • Public exponent [fixed value, random]

      The evaluator shall verify the ability of the TSF to correctly produce values for the RSA key components, including the public verification exponent e, the private prime factors p and q, the public modulus n, and the calculation of the private signature exponent d.

    • Test FCS_CKM.1/AKG:2:

      Testing for Random Provable Primes and Conditional Methods

      57. To test the key generation method for the random provable primes method and for all the primes with conditions methods (methods 1, 3-5), the evaluator must seed the TSF key generation routine with sufficient data to deterministically generate the RSA key pair. For each supported combination of the above input parameters, the evaluator shall have the TSF generate 25 key pairs. The evaluator shall verify the correctness of the TSF’s implementation by comparing values generated by the TSF with those generated by a known good implementation using the same input parameters.

    • Test FCS_CKM.1/AKG:3:

      Testing for Random Probable Primes Method

      58. If the TOE generates random probable primes (method 2) then, if possible, the random probable primes method should also be verified against a known good implementation as described above. If verification against a known good implementation is not possible, the evaluator shall have the TSF generate 25 key pairs for each supported key length nlen and verify that all of the following are true.

      • n = p*q

      • p and q are probably prime according to Miller-Rabin tests with error probability <2(-125)

      • 216 < e < 2256 and e is an odd integer

      • GCD(p-1,e) = 1

      • GCD(q-1,e) = 1

      • |p-q| > 2(nlen/2 – 100)

      • p ≥ squareroot(2)*( 2(nlen/2 -1) )

      • q ≥ squareroot(2)*( 2(nlen/2 -1) )

      • 2(nlen/2) < d < LCM(p-1,q-1)

      • e*d = 1 mod LCM(p-1,q-1)

    • Test FCS_CKM.1/AKG:4:

      Elliptic Curve Key Generation

      59. To test the TOE’s ability to generate asymmetric cryptographic keys using elliptic curves, the evaluator shall perform the ECC Key Generation Test and the ECC Key Validation Test using the following input parameters:

      1. Elliptic curve [P-256, P-384, P-521]

      2. Key pair generation method [extra random bits, rejection sampling]

    • Test FCS_CKM.1/AKG:5:

      ECC Key Generation Test

      60. For each supported combination of the above input parameters the evaluator shall require the implementation under test to generate 10 private/public key pairs (d, Q). The private key, d, shall be generated using a random bit generator as specified in FCS_RBG.1. The private key, d, is used to compute the public key, Q’. The evaluator shall confirm that 0<d<n (where n is the order of the group), and the computed value Q’ is then compared to the generated public/private key pairs’ public key, Q, to confirm that Q is equal to Q’.

    • Test FCS_CKM.1/AKG:6:

      ECC Key Validation Test

      61. For each supported combination of the above parameters the evaluator shall generate 12 private/public key pairs using the key generation function of a known-good implementation. For each set of 12 public keys, the evaluator shall modify four public key values by shifting x or y out of range by adding the order of the field and modify four other public key values by shifting x or y so that they are still in bounds, but not on the curve. The remaining public key values are left unchanged (i.e., correct). To determine correctness, the evaluator shall submit the public keys to the public key validation (PKV) function of the TOE and shall confirm that the results correspond as expected for the modified and unmodified values.

    • Test FCS_CKM.1/AKG:7:

      Finite Field Cryptography Key Generation

      62. To test the TOE’s ability to generate asymmetric cryptographic keys using finite fields, the evaluator shall perform the Safe Primes Generation Test and the Safe Primes Validation Test using the following input parameter:

      1. Fields/Groups [MODP-3072, MODP-4096, MODP-6144, MODP-8192, ffdhe3072, ffdhe4096, ffdhe6144, ffdhe8192]

    • Test FCS_CKM.1/AKG:8:

      Safe Primes Generation Test

      63. For each supported safe primes group, generate 10 key pairs. The evaluator shall verify the correctness of the TSF’s implementation by comparing values generated by the TSF with those generated by a known good implementation using the same input parameters.

    • Test FCS_CKM.1/AKG:9:

      Safe Primes Validation Test

      64. For each supported safe primes group, use a known good implementation to generate 10 key pairs. For each set of 10, the evaluator shall modify three such that they are incorrect. The remaining values are left unmodified (i.e. correct). To determine correctness, the evaluator shall submit the key pairs to the public key validation (PKV) function of the TOE and shall confirm that the results correspond as expected for the modified and unmodified values.

    • Test FCS_CKM.1/AKG:10:

      LMS Key Generation

      65. To test the TOE’s ability to generate asymmetric cryptographic keys using LMS, the evaluator shall perform the LMS Key Generation Test using the following input parameters:

      1. Hash algorithm [SHA-256/192, SHAKE256/192, SHA-256, SHAKE256]

      2. Winternitz [1, 2, 4, 8]

      3. Tree height [5, 10, 15, 20, 25]

    • Test FCS_CKM.1/AKG:11:

      LMS Key Generation Test

      66. For each supported combination of the hash algorithm, Winternitz parameter, and tree height, the evaluator shall generate one public key for each of the test cases. The number of test cases depends on the tree height, as follows:

      • For height of 5, use 5 test cases

      • For height of 10, use 4 test cases

      • For height of 15, use 3 test cases

      • For height of 20, use 2 test cases

      • For height of 25, use 1 test case

      The evaluator shall verify the correctness of the TSF’s implementation by comparing the public key generated by the TSF with that generated by a known good implementation using the same input parameters.

    • Test FCS_CKM.1/AKG:12:

      ML-KEM Key Generation

      67. To test the TOE’s ability to generate asymmetric cryptographic keys using MLKEM, the evaluator shall perform the Algorithm Functional Test using the following input parameters:

      • Parameter set [ML-KEM-1024]

      • Random seed d [32 bytes]

      • Random seed z [32 bytes]

      Algorithm Functional Test

      68. For each supported parameter set the evaluator shall require the implementation under test to generate 25 key pairs using 25 different randomly generated pairs of 32-byte seed values (d, z). To determine correctness, the evaluator shall compare the resulting key pairs (ek, dk) with those generated using a known-good implementation using the same inputs.

    • Test FCS_CKM.1/AKG:13:

      ML-DSA Key Generation

      69. To test the TOE’s ability to generate asymmetric cryptographic keys using MLDSA, the evaluator shall perform the Algorithm Functional Test using the following input parameters:

      • Parameter set [ML-DSA-87]

      • Random seed [32 bytes]

      Algorithm Functional Test

      For each supported parameter set the evaluator shall require the implementation under test to generate 25 key pairs using 25 different randomly generated 32-byte seed values. To determine correctness, the evaluator shall compare the resulting key pairs with those generated using a known-good implementation using the same inputs.

    • Test FCS_CKM.1/AKG:14:

      XMSS Key Generation

      70. To test the TOE’s ability to generate asymmetric cryptographic keys using XMSS, the evaluator shall perform the XMSS Key Generation Test using the following input parameters:

      • Hash algorithm [SHA-256/192, SHAKE256/192, SHA-256, SHAKE256]

      • Tree height [10, 16, 20] (XMSS only)

      XMSS Key Generation Test

      For each supported combination of hash algorithm and tree height, the evaluator shall generate one public key for each test case. The number of test cases depends on the tree height as specified as follows:

      • For height of 10, use 5 test cases

      • For height of 16, use 4 test cases

      • For height of 20, use 3 test cases

      • For height of 40, use 2 test cases

      • For height of 60, use 1 test case

      The evaluator shall verify the correctness of the TSF’s implementation by comparing values generated by the TSF with those generated by a known good implementation using the same input parameters.

      Note: The number of test cases is limited due to the extreme amount of time it can take to generate XMSS trees.

    FCS_CKM.6 Timing and Event of Cryptographic Key Destruction

    The TSF shall destroy plaintext cryptographic keys (including keying material) when [selection: no longer needed, [assignment: other circumstances for key or keying material destruction]].
    Application Note:

    Application Note 12

    The TOE will have mechanisms to destroy keys, including intermediate keys and key material, by using an approved method as specified in FCS_CKM.6.2. Examples of keys include intermediate keys, leaf keys, encryption keys, and signing keys. Key material includes seeds, authentication secrets, passwords, PINs, and other secret values used to derive keys.

    This SFR does not apply to the public component of asymmetric key pairs or to keys that are permitted to remain stored, such as device identification keys.

    The TSF shall destroy plaintext cryptographic keys and keying material specified by FCS_CKM.6.1 in accordance with a specified cryptographic key destruction method

    [selection:
    • For volatile storage, the destruction shall be executed by a [selection:
      • single overwrite consisting of [selection: a pseudo-random pattern using the TSF’s RBG (as specified in FCS_RBG.1), zeros, ones, a new value of a key, [assignment: some value that does not contain any CSP]]
      • removal of power to the memory
      • removal of all references to the key directly followed by a request for garbage collection
      ];
    • For non-volatile storage [selection:
      • that consists of an invocation of an interface provided by a part of the TSF, the destruction shall be executed by: [selection:
        • logically addressing the storage location of the key and performing a [selection: single, [assignment: number of passes] -pass] overwrite consisting of [selection: a pseudo-random pattern using the TSF's RBG (as specified in FCS_RBG.1), zeroes, ones, a new value of the key, [assignment: a static or dynamic value that does not contain any CSP]]
        • instructing a part of the TSF to destroy the abstraction that represents the key
        ]
      • that employs a wear-leveling algorithm, the destruction shall be executed by a [selection:
        • single overwrite consisting of [selection: zeroes, ones, pseudo-random pattern, a new value of a key of the same size, [assignment: some value that does not contain any CSP]]
        • block erase
        ];
      • that does not employ a wear-leveling algorithm, the destruction shall be executed by a [selection:
        • [selection: single, [assignment: ST author defined multi-pass]] overwrite consisting of [selection: zeros, ones, pseudo-random pattern, a new value of a key of the same size, [assignment: some value that does not contain any CSP]] followed by a read-verify. If the read-verification of the overwritten data fails, the process shall be repeated up to [assignment: number of times to attempt overwrite] times, whereupon an error is returned.
        • block erase
        ]
      ]
    ]

    ] that meets the following: [no standard].

    Application Note:

    In the case of volatile memory, the selection “removal of all references to the key directly followed by a request for garbage collection” is used in a situation where the TSF cannot address the specific physical memory locations holding the data to be erased and therefore relies on addressing logical addresses (which frees the relevant physical addresses holding the old data) and then requesting the platform to ensure that the data in the physical addresses is no longer available for reading (i.e., the “garbage collection” referred to in the SFR text).

    In parts of the selections where keys are identified as being destroyed by “a part of the TSF”, the TSS identifies the relevant part and the interface involved. The interface referenced in the requirement could take different forms for different TOEs, the most likely of which is an application programming interface to an OS kernel. There may be various levels of abstraction visible. For instance, in a given implementation the application may have access to the file system details and may be able to logically address specific memory locations. In another implementation the application may simply have a handle to a resource and can only ask another part of the TSF such as the interpreter or OS to delete the resource.

    Where different key destruction methods are used for different keys and/or different destruction situations then the different methods and the keys/situations they apply to are described in the TSS (and the ST may use separate iterations of the SFR to aid clarity). The TSS describes all relevant keys used in the implementation of SFRs, including cases where the keys are stored in a non-plaintext form. In the case of non-plaintext storage, the encryption method and relevant key-encrypting-key are identified in the TSS.

    The selection for destruction of data in non-volatile memory includes block erase as an option, and this option applies only to flash memory. A block erase does not require a read verify, since the mappings of logical addresses to the erased memory locations are erased, as well as the data itself.

    Some selections allow the assignment of “some value that does not contain any CSP.” This means that the TOE uses some specified data not drawn from an RBG meeting FCS_RBG requirements and not being any of the values listed as other selection options. The point of the phrase “does not contain any CSP” is to ensure that the overwritten data is carefully selected and not taken from a general pool that might contain data that itself requires confidentiality protection.

    71. The evaluator shall examine the TSS to ensure it lists all relevant keys (describing the origin and storage location of each), all relevant key destruction situations (e.g., factory reset or device wipe function, disconnection of trusted channels, key change as part of a secure channel protocol), and the destruction method used in each case. For the purpose of this Evaluation Activity the relevant keys are those keys that are relied upon to support any of the SFRs in the Security Target. The evaluator shall confirm that the description of keys and storage locations is consistent with the functions carried out by the TOE (e.g., that all keys for the TOE-specific secure channels and protocols, or that support FPT_APW.EXT.1 and FPT_SKP_EXT.1, are accounted for[2]). In particular, if a TOE claims not to store plaintext keys in non-volatile memory then the evaluator shall check that this is consistent with the operation of the TOE.

    72. The evaluator shall check to ensure the TSS identifies how the TOE destroys keys stored as plaintext in non-volatile memory, and that the description includes identification and description of the interfaces that the TOE uses to destroy keys (e.g., file system APIs, key store APIs).

    73.Note that where selections involve ‘destruction of reference’ (for volatile memory) or ‘invocation of an interface’ (for non-volatile memory) then the relevant interface definition is examined by the evaluator to ensure that the interface supports the selection(s) and description in the TSS. In the case of nonvolatile memory, the evaluator includes in their examination the relevant interface description for each media type on which plaintext keys are stored. The presence of OS-level and storage device-level swap and cache files is not examined in the current version of the Evaluation Activity.

    74. Where the TSS identifies keys that are stored in a non-plaintext form, the evaluator shall check that the TSS identifies the encryption method and the keyencrypting-key used, and that the key-encrypting-key is either itself stored in an encrypted form or that it is destroyed by a method included under FCS_CKM.6.

    75. The evaluator shall check that the TSS identifies any configurations or circumstances that may not conform to the key destruction requirement (see further discussion in the Guidance Documentation section below). Note that reference may be made to the Guidance Documentation for description of the detail of such cases where destruction may be prevented or delayed.

    76. Where the ST specifies the use of “a static or dynamic value that does not contain any CSP” to overwrite keys, the evaluator shall examine the TSS to ensure that it describes how that pattern is obtained and used, and that this justifies the claim that the pattern does not contain any CSPs.

    Guidance

    77. A TOE may be subject to situations that could prevent or delay key destruction in some cases. The evaluator shall check that the guidance documentation identifies configurations or circumstances that may not strictly conform to the key destruction requirement, and that this description is consistent with the relevant parts of the TSS (and any other supporting information used). The evaluator shall check that the guidance documentation provides guidance on situations where key destruction may be delayed at the physical layer.

    78. For example, when the TOE does not have full access to the physical memory, it is possible that the storage may be implementing wear-levelling and garbage collection. This may result in additional copies of the key that are logically inaccessible but persist physically. Where available, the TOE might then describe use of the TRIM command[3] and garbage collection to destroy these persistent copies upon their deletion (this would be explained in the TSS and Operational Guidance).

    Tests
    None

    FCS_CKM_EXT.7 Cryptographic Key Agreement

    The TSF shall derive shared cryptographic keys with input from multiple parties in accordance with specified cryptographic key agreement algorithms

    [selection: Cryptographic Key Generation Algorithm] and specified cryptographic parameters [selection: Cryptographic Algorithm Parameters] that meet the following: [selection: List of Standards] The following table provides the allowed choices for completion of the selection operations of FCS_CKM_EXT.7.1.
    Table 4: Allowed choices for FCS_CKM_EXT.7.1
    Identifier Cryptographic Key Generation Algorithm Cryptographic Algorithm Parameters List of Standards
    DHFinite Field Cryptography Diffie-HellmanStatic domain parameters approved for [selection:
    • IKE Groups [selection: MODP-2048, MODP-3072, MODP-4096, MODP-6144, MODP-8192]
    • TLS Groups [selection: ffdhe-2048, ffdhe-3072, ffdhe-4096, ffdhe-6144, ffdhe-8192]
    ]
    NIST SP 800-56A Revision 3 (Section 5.7.1.1), [selection: RFC 3526 [IKE groups], RFC 7919 [TLS groups]]
    ECDHElliptic Curve Diffie-HellmanElliptic Curve [selection: P-256, P-384, P-521]NIST SP 800-56A Revision 3 (Section 5.7.1.2) [ECDH]NIST SP 800-186 (Section 3.2.1) [NIST Curves]
    Application Note:

    Application Note 14

    This requirement specifies key transport schemes. Key agreement schemes refer to cases in which two or more parties want to establish a single key between them, and all parties contribute to the entropy of the agreed-upon key.

    The ST author selects all key agreement schemes used for the selected cryptographic protocols.

    The elliptic curves used for the key agreement scheme correlate with the curves specified in FCS_CKM.1.1/AKG.

    The static domain parameters approved for the finite field-based key agreement scheme are specified by the key generation according to FCS_CKM.1.1/AKG.

    For Key Transport, see FCS_CKM.2 in Annex A.

    80. The evaluator shall ensure that the TSS documents that the security strength of the material contributed by the TOE is sufficient for the security strength of the key and the agreement method.

    81. The intent of this activity is to be able to identify the scheme being used by each service. This would mean, for example, one way to document scheme usage could be as shown in the table below. The information provided in this example does not necessarily have to be included as a table but can be presented in other ways as long as the necessary data is available. The relevant SFR citation may come from a functional package if the TOE boundary includes any functional packages that define uses of key establishment schemes. For example, FCS_TLSS_EXT.1 is referenced below, which would be appropriate if the TOE includes that SFR claim as part of conformance to the Functional Package for TLS.

    <table>

    Guidance

    82. The evaluator shall verify that the AGD guidance instructs the administrator how to configure the TOE to use the selected key agreement method(s).

    Tests
    83. The following tests are conditional based upon the selections made in the SFR. The evaluator shall perform the following test or witness respective tests executed by the developer. The tests must be executed on a platform that is as close as practically possible to the operational platform (but which may be instrumented in terms of, for example, use of a debug mode). Where the test is not carried out on the TOE itself, the test platform shall be identified and the differences between test environment and TOE execution environment shall be described.




    • Test FCS_CKM_EXT.7:1:

      FFC Diffie-Hellman Key Agreement

      84. To test the TOE’s implementation of FFC Diffie-Hellman Key Agreement, the evaluator shall perform the Algorithm Functional Test and Validation Test using the following input parameters:

      • Domain Parameter Group [MODP-2048, MODP-3072, MODP-4096, MODP-6144, MODP-8192, ffdhe3072, ffdhe4096, ffdhe6144, ffdhe8192]

    • Test FCS_CKM_EXT.7:2:

      Algorithm Functional Test

      85. For each supported domain parameter group, the evaluator shall generate 10 test cases by generating the initiator and responder secret keys using random data, calculating the responder public key, and creating the shared secret. The resulting shared secrets shall be compared with those generated by a knowngood implementation using the same inputs.

    • Test FCS_CKM_EXT.7:3:

      Validation Test

      86. For each supported combination of the above parameters the evaluator shall generate 15 Diffie Hellman initiator/responder key pairs using the key generation function of a known-good implementation. For each set of key pairs, the evaluator shall modify five initiator private key values. The remaining key values are left unchanged (i.e., correct). To determine correctness, the evaluator shall confirm that the 15 shared secrets correspond as expected for both the modified and unmodified inputs.

    • Test FCS_CKM_EXT.7:4:

      Elliptic Curve Diffie-Hellman Key Agreement

      87. To test the TOE’s implementation of Elliptic Curve Diffie-Hellman Key Agreement, the evaluator shall perform the Algorithm Functional Test and Validation Test using the following input parameters:

      • Elliptic Curve [P-256, P-384, P-521]

    • Test FCS_CKM_EXT.7:5:

      Algorithm Functional Test

      88. For each supported Elliptic Curve the evaluator shall generate 10 test cases by generating the initiator and responder secret keys using random data, calculating the responder public key, and creating the shared secret. The resulting shared secrets shall be compared with those generated by a knowngood implementation using the same inputs.

    • Test FCS_CKM_EXT.7:6:

      Validation Test

      89. For each supported Elliptic Curve the evaluator shall generate 15 Diffie Hellman initiator/responder key pairs using the key generation function of a knowngood implementation. For each set of key pairs, the evaluator shall modify five initiator private key values. The remaining key values are left unchanged (i.e., correct). To determine correctness, the evaluator shall confirm that the 15 shared secrets correspond as expected for the modified and unmodified values.

    FCS_COP.1/DataEncryption Cryptographic Operation (AES Data Encryption/Decryption)

    The TSF shall perform encryption/decryption in accordance with a specified cryptographic algorithm AES operating in

    [selection: CBC mode as defined in FCS_COP.1/SKC, CTR mode as defined in FCS_COP.1/SKC, XTS mode as defined in FCS_COP.1/SKC, CCM mode as defined in FCS_COP.1/AEAD, GCM mode as defined in FCS_COP.1/AEAD].
    Application Note:

    Application Note 15

    The ST author selects the mode or modes in which AES operates. If CBC mode, CTR mode, or XTS mode is selected then FCS_COP.1/SKC from Annex B must be included. If CCM mode or GCM mode is selected, then FCS_COP.1/AEAD from Annex B must be included.

    90. The evaluator shall examine the TSS to ensure it identifies the mode or modes in which AES operates.

    Guidance

    91. There are no additional Guidance evaluation activities for this component.

    Tests
    92. There are no additional Test evaluation activities for this component.

    FCS_COP.1/Hash Cryptographic Operation (Hash Algorithm)

    The TSF shall perform cryptographic hashing in accordance with a specified cryptographic algorithm

    [selection: SHA-256, SHA-384, SHA-512, SHA3-256, SHA3-384, SHA3-512] that meets the following: [selection: ISO/IEC 10118-3:2018 [SHA, SHA3], FIPS PUB 180-4 [SHA], FIPS PUB 202 [SHA3]].
    Application Note:

    Application Note 18

    The hash function selection should have an output length that is the same or greater than the security strength of the algorithm used for signature generation. For example, the TOE should choose SHA-384 for 3072-bit RSA, 4096-bit RSA, or ECC with P-384; and SHA-512 for ECC with P-521. The ST author selects the standard based on the algorithms selected. For FCS_COP.1.1/Hash, SHA3 hashes may be used only for image signing or boot integrity verification.

    135. The evaluator shall check that the association of the hash function with other TSF cryptographic functions (for example, the digital signature verification function) is documented in the TSS.

    Guidance

    136. The evaluator shall check the AGD documents to determine that any configuration that is required to configure the required hash sizes is present.

    Tests

    137. The following tests may require the developer to provide access to a test platform that provides the evaluator with tools that are typically not found on factory products.

    138. The following tests are conditional based upon the selections made in the SFR. The evaluator shall perform the following test or witness respective tests executed by the developer. The tests must be executed on a platform that is as close as practically possible to the operational platform (but which may be instrumented in terms of, for example, use of a debug mode). Where the test is not carried out on the TOE itself, the test platform shall be identified and the differences between test environment and TOE execution environment shall be described.


    • Test FCS_COP.1/Hash:1:

      SHA-256, SHA-384, SHA-512

      139. To test the TOE’s ability to generate hash digests using SHA2 the evaluator shall perform the Algorithm Functional Test, Monte Carlo Test, and Large Data Test for each claimed SHA2 algorithm.

      Algorithm Functional Test

      140. The evaluator shall generate a number of test cases equal to the block size of the hash (512 for SHA2-256; 1024 for the other SHA2 algorithms).

      141. Each test case is to consist of random data of a random length between 0 and 65536 bits, or the largest size supported.

      142. Each test case is to consist of random data of a random length between 0 and 65536 bits, or the largest size supported.

      Monte Carlo Test

      143. Monte Carlo tests begin with a single seed and run 100 iterations of the chained computation.

      144. There are two versions of the Monte Carlo test for SHA-1 and SHA-2. Either one is acceptable. For the Standard Monte Carlo test the message hashed is always three times the length of the initial seed.

      For j = 0 to 99 
             A = B = C = SEED 
             For i = 0 to 999 
                      MSG = A || B || C 
                      MD = SHA(MSG) 
                      A = B 
                      B = C
                      C = MD 
              Output MD 
              SEED = MD 

      145. For the alternate version of the Monte Carlo Test, the hashed message is always the same length as the seed.

      INITIAL_SEED_LENGTH = LEN(SEED) 
      For j = 0 to 99 
             A = B = C = SEED 
             For i = 0 to 999 
                      MSG = A || B || C 
                      if LEN(MSG) >= INITIAL_SEED_LENGTH: 
                              MSG = leftmost INITIAL_SEED_LENGTH bits of MSG 
                      else: 
                              MSG = MSG || INITIAL_SEED_LENGTH - LEN(MSG) 0 bits 
                      MD = SHA(MSG) 
                      A = B 
                      B = C 
                      C = MD 
              Output MD 
              SEED = MD 

      146. The evaluator shall compare the output against results generated by a known-good implementation with the same input

      Large Data Test

      147. The implementation must be tested against one test case each on large data messages of 1GB, 2GB, 4GB, and 8GB of data as supported. The data need not be random. It may, for example, consist of a repeated pattern of 64 bits.

      148. The evaluator shall compare the output against results generated by a known-good implementation with the same input.

      • Test FCS_COP.1/Hash:2:

        SHA3-384, SHA3-512

        149. To test the TOE’s ability to generate hash digests using SHA3 the evaluator shall perform the Algorithm Functional Test, Monte Carlo Test, and Large Data Tests for each claimed SHA3 algorithm.

        Algorithm Functional Test

        150. Generate a test case consisting of random data for every message length from 0 bits (or the smallest supported message size) to rate bits, where rate equals

        • 832 for SHA3-384 and

        • 576 for SHA3-512.

        151. Additionally, generate tests cases of random data for messages of every multiple of (rate+1) bits starting at length rate, and continuing until 65535 is exceeded.

        152. The evaluator shall compare the output against results generated by a known-good implementation with the same input.

        Monte Carlo Test

        153. Monte Carlo tests begin with a single seed and run 100 iterations of the chained computation.

        154. For this Monte Carlo Test, the hashed message is always the same length as the seed.

        MD[0] = SEED 
        INITIAL_SEED_LENGTH = LEN(SEED) 
        For 100 iterations 
               For i = 1 to 1000 
                        MSG = MD[i-1]; 
                        if LEN(MSG) >= INITIAL_SEED_LENGTH: 
                                MSG = leftmost INITIAL_SEED_LENGTH bits of MSG 
                        else: 
                                MSG = MSG || INITIAL_SEED_LENGTH - LEN(MSG) 0 bits 
                        MD[i] = SHA3(MSG) 
                MD[0] = MD[1000] 
                Output MD[0] 

        155. The evaluator shall compare the output against results generated by a known-good implementation with the same input.

        Large Data Test

        156. The implementation must be tested against one test case each on large data messages of 1GB, 2GB, 4GB, and 8GB of data as supported. The data need not be random. It may, for example, consist of a repeated pattern of 64 bits.

        157. The evaluator shall compare the output against results generated by a known-good implementation with the same input.

        FCS_COP.1/KeyedHash Cryptographic Operation (Keyed Hash Algorithm)

        The TSF shall perform [keyed hash message authentication] in accordance with a specified cryptographic algorithm [selection: Keyed Hash Algorithm] and cryptographic key sizes [selection: Cryptographic key sizes] that meet the following: [selection: List of standards] .

        provides the allowable choices for completion of the selection operations of FCS_COP.1/KeyedHash.
        Table 5: Allowable choices for FCS_COP.1/KeyedHash
        Keyed Hash Algorithm Cryptographic key sizes List of standards
        HMAC-SHA-384[selection: 384 (ISO, FIPS), 256 (FIPS)] bits [selection: ISO/IEC 9797-2:2021 (Section 7 "MAC Algorithm 2"), FIPS PUB 198-1]
        HMAC-SHA-512[selection: 512 (ISO, FIPS), 384 (FIPS), 256 (FIPS)] bits [selection: ISO/IEC 9797-2:2021 (Section 7 "MAC Algorithm 2"), FIPS PUB 198-1]
        HMAC-SHA-256256 bits [selection: ISO/IEC 9797-2:2021 (Section 7 "MAC Algorithm 2"), FIPS PUB 198-1]
        Application Note:

        Application Note 19

        The HMAC minimum key sizes in the table are specified in ISO/IEC 9797-2:2021, which requires that the minimum key size be equal to the digest size. The FIPS standard specifies no minimum or maximum key sizes, so if FIPS PUB 198-1 is selected, larger or smaller key sizes may be used. This is indicted by the parenthesized annotations in the Cryptographic Key Sizes column. Select 'implicit' in cases where keyed-hash message authentication is done implicitly (e.g., SSH using AES in GCM mode).

        158. The evaluator shall examine the TSS to ensure that the size of the key is sufficient for the desired security strength of the output.

        Guidance

        159. There are no additional Guidance evaluation activities for this component.

        Tests

        160. The following tests are conditional based upon the selections made in the SFR. The evaluator shall perform the following test or witness respective tests executed by the developer. The tests must be executed on a platform that is as close as practically possible to the operational platform (but which may be instrumented in terms of, for example, use of a debug mode). Where the test is not carried out on the TOE itself, the test platform shall be identified and the differences between test environment and TOE execution environment shall be described.

        • Test FCS_COP.1/KeyedHash:1:

          HMAC

          161. To test the TOE’s ability to generate keyed hashes using HMAC the evaluator shall perform the Algorithm Functional Test for each combination of claimed HMAC algorithm the following parameters:

          • Hash function [SHA-256, SHA-384, SHA-512]

          • Key length [8-65536] bits by 8s

          • MAC length [32-[digest size of hash function (256, 384, 512)]] bits

          Algorithm Functional Test

          162. For each supported Hash function the evaluator shall generate 150 test cases using random input messages of 128 bits, random supported key lengths, random keys, and random supported MAC lengths such that across the 150 test cases:

          • The key length includes the minimum, the maximum, a key length equal to the block size, and key lengths that are both larger and smaller than the block size.

          • The MAC size includes the minimum, the maximum, and two other random values.

          163. The evaluator shall compare the output against results generated by a known-good implementation with the same input.

        FCS_COP.1/SigGen Cryptographic Operation - Signature Generation

        The TSF shall perform [digital signature generation] in accordance with a specified cryptographic algorithm [selection: Cryptographic algorithm] and cryptographic key sizes [selection: Cryptographic key sizes] that meet the following: [selection: List of standards] .

        The following table provides the allowable choices for completion of the selection operations of FCS_COP.1/SigGen.
        Table 6: Allowable choices for FCS_COP.1/SigGen
        Identifier Cryptographic algorithm Cryptographic key sizes List of standards
        RSA-PKCSRSASSA-PKCS1-v1_5Modulus of size [selection: 2048, 3072, 4096, 6144, 8192] bits and hash [selection: SHA-256, SHA-384, SHA-512]RFC 8017 (Section 8.2) [PKCS #1 v2.2]

        FIPS PUB 186-5 (Section 5.4) [RSASSA-PKCS1-v1_5]
        RSA-PSSRSASSA-PSSModulus of size [selection: 2048, 3072, 4096, 6144, 8192] bits and hash [selection: SHA-256, SHA-384, SHA-512],Salt Length (sLen) such that [assignment: 0 ≤ sLen ≤ hLen (Hash Output Length)] and Mask Generation Function = MGF1RFC 8017 (Section 8.1) [PKCS#1 v2.2]

        FIPS PUB 186-5 (Section 5.4) [RSASSA-PSS]
        ECDSAECDSAElliptic Curve [selection: P-256, P-384, P-521],per-message secret number generation [selection: extra random bits, rejection sampling, deterministic] and hash function using [selection: SHA-256, SHA-384, SHA-512][selection: ISO/IEC 14888-3:2018 (Subclause 6.6), FIPS PUB 186-5 (Sections 6.3.1, 6.4.1]] [ECDSA]

        NIST SP-800 186 (Section 4) [NIST Curves]
        ML-DSAML-DSA Signature GenerationParameter set = ML-DSA-87NIST FIPS 204 (Section 5.2)
        Application Note:

        Application Note 16

        The ST author should choose the cryptographic algorithms, parameters, and standards implemented to perform digital signature generation. For the algorithm chosen, the ST author should make the appropriate assignments/selections to specify the parameters that are implemented for that algorithm.

        93. The evaluator shall examine the TSS and verify that any hash function is the appropriate security strength for the signing algorithm.

        94. The evaluator shall examine the TSS to verify that any one-time values such as nonces or masks are constructed and used in accordance with the relevant standards.

        95. The evaluator shall examine the TSS to verify that the TOE has appropriate measures in place to ensure that hash-based signature algorithms do not reuse private keys.

        96. The evaluator shall examine the TSS to determine that it specifies the cryptographic algorithm(s) and key size(s) supported by the TOE for signature generation services.

        Guidance

        97. There are no additional Guidance evaluation activities for this component.

        Tests

        98. The following tests are conditional based upon the selections made in the SFR. The evaluator shall perform the following test or witness respective tests executed by the developer. The tests must be executed on a platform that is as close as practically possible to the operational platform (but which may be instrumented in terms of, for example, use of a debug mode). Where the test is not carried out on the TOE itself, the test platform shall be identified and the differences between test environment and TOE execution environment shall be described.








        • Test FCS_COP.1/SigGen:1:

          RSA-PKCS Signature Generation

          99. To test the TOE’s ability to perform RSA Digital Signature Generation using PKCS1-v1,5 signature type, the evaluator shall perform the Generated Data Test using the following input parameters:

          • Modulus size [2048, 3072, 4096, 6144, 8192] bits

          • Hash algorithm [SHA-256, SHA-384, SHA-512]

          Generated Data Test

          100. For each supported combination of the above parameters, the evaluator shall cause the TOE to generate three test cases using random data. The evaluator shall compare the results against those from a known-good implementation.

        • Test FCS_COP.1/SigGen:2:

          RSA-PSS Signature Generation

          101. To test the TOE’s ability to perform RSA Digital Signature Generation using PSS signature type, the evaluator shall perform the Generated Data Test using the following input parameters:

          • Modulus size [2048, 3072, 4096, 6144, 8192] bits

          • Hash algorithm [SHA-256, SHA-384, SHA-512]

          • Salt length [Fixed based on implementation]

          • Mask function [MGF1]

          Generated Data Test

          102. For each supported combination of the above parameters, the evaluator shall cause the TOE to generate three test cases using random data. The evaluator shall compare the results against those from a known-good implementation.

        • Test FCS_COP.1/SigGen:3:

          ECDSA Signature Generation

          103. To test the TOE’s ability to perform ECDSA Digital Signature Generation using extra random bits or rejection sampling for secret number generation, the evaluator shall perform the Algorithm Functional Test using the following input parameters:

          • Elliptic Curve [P-256, P-384, P-521]

          • Hash algorithm [SHA-256, SHA-384, SHA-512]

          104. To test the TOE’s ability to perform ECDSA Digital Signature Generation using deterministic secret number generation, the evaluator shall perform the Algorithm Functional Test using the following input parameters:

          • Elliptic Curve [P-256, P-384, P-521]

          • Hash algorithm [SHA-256, SHA-384, SHA-512]

          Algorithm Functional Test

          105. For each supported combination of the above parameters, the evaluator shall cause the TOE to generate 10 test cases using random data. The evaluator shall compare the results against those from a known-good implementation.

        • Test FCS_COP.1/SigGen:4:

          LMS Signature Generation

          106. To test the TOE’s ability to generate cryptographic digital signature using LMS, the evaluator shall perform the Algorithm Functional Test using the following input parameters:

          • Hash algorithm [SHA-256/192, SHAKE256/192, SHA-256, SHAKE256]

          • Winternitz [1, 2, 4, 8]

          • Tree height [5, 10, 15, 20, 25]

          Algorithm Functional Test

          107. For each supported combination of the above parameters, the evaluator shall generate 10 signatures. The evaluator shall verify the correctness of the implementation by comparing values generated by the TOE with those generated by a known good implementation using the same input parameters.

        • Test FCS_COP.1/SigGen:5:

          ML-DSA Signature Generation

          108. To test the TOE’s ability to generate digital signatures using ML-DSA, the evaluator shall perform the Algorithm Functional Test using the following input parameters:

          • Parameter set [ML-DSA-87]

          • Seed [32 random bytes] (for non-deterministic signature testing), or

          • Seed [32 zero bytes] (for deterministic signature testing)

          • Message to sign [8-65535] bytes

          • Mu value (if generated externally)

          • Previously generated private key (sk)

          • Context (for external interface testing)

          Algorithm Functional Test

          109. For each combination of supported parameter set and capabilities, the evaluator shall require the implementation under test to generate 15 signatures pairs using 15 different randomly generated 32-byte seed values. To determine correctness, the evaluator shall compare the resulting key pairs with those generated using a known-good implementation using the same inputs.

        • Test FCS_COP.1/SigGen:6:

          Known Answer Test for Rejection Cases

          110. For each supported parameter set, the evaluator shall cause the TOE to generate signatures using the data below and a deterministic seed of all 0’s. Correctness is determined by comparing the hash of the resulting signature with the hash in the fourth row for each corresponding test case below.

          The test values are defined as follows:

          • Seed is the seed to generate the key pair (pk, sk)

          • Hash of keys is computed by SHA-256(pk||sk)

          • Message is the message to be signed

          • Hash of sig is computed by SHA-256(sig)

          ML-DSA-87 Test Cases for Rejection Cases

          Test case 87-RC-01
          Seed: E4F5AFCF697E0EC3C1BDEB66FAA903221E803902F9C3F716E1056A63D77DC250
          Hash of Keys: 61618E8DDA6998072C8EB36974E03880D741CAF0BD523356DFC161E7C9E63934
          Message: F4F1C05004D5B946F69EAFE104C4020519086ADDB9582A20FDE887D13DFC36B1
          Hash of sig: B584E38FA442FC3C81A147D4BDBF058D73C822CAF5CA4C06B0110867F60A8001
          Test case 87-RC-02
          Seed: 8B828D871254D6C57384A8E7025AA3F7160CAD1D2C754499DF3844426062C3DD
          Hash of Keys: BB64481317D6C0DBAD20C0C7EF11078AD54E5D574F4A07652115A95F77C655FA
          Message: 0F9409C5A4930C25B83FC5B77FDB5BB49C75372DE724D9C1A77DB700CF0CF154
          Hash of sig: F86B49BE9DEB2B209BDEB4E922E5939E92D38E562C44BB09AFBD67323C345192
          Test case 87-RC-03
          Seed: E693D282CACB8CE65FD4D108DA7A373F097F0AA9713550BE242AAD5BD3E2E452
          Hash of Keys: B0BEAF56713A69BD4AB2CBEE006FA5001E7B41F3AE541E05F088933AA0CC78DF
          Message: 24DABB9D57ADEBD560ED65D9451C5106D437061708F849BA53F3543CDF9AAAE0
          Hash of sig: DBF65CEFF9F96A74AAF6F3AB27B043231BE6AA04FBA2EEC987A24A00BDD6A08E
          Test case 87-RC-04
          Seed: 4002163EB8EED01A8E0919BA8C07D291341EDCAE25B02B9779A2CFFE50561AF0
          Hash of Keys: FED1BE685C20ECB322FC40D41DEE7E0E98D0409FBF989CAE71B8AD2D58AD645E
          Message: EE316BB5EBED53325B4A55571C60657B53E353B51B831F4A0BBB28107EBA4BA8
          Hash of sig: 3BE9B5545FDCED92547B3409C83B3312CCB5792A8EC3A4DA63BA692C79BEF17C
          Test case 87-RC-05
          Seed: 9C7AD524F65854C27E565BCEDF8E86D650F13A40D0448F9AE10C05F10F777120
          Hash of Keys: 0EA872CA5A4BEA94F4E8EF7ED31800727899A51059FDEE111E5CB15F0233B534
          Message: CE09831294AA96CAF684B9E667947B021C57B24C138EC7D4DA270694C82F2E08
          Hash of sig: 3B9526CEE6587F2418BFE603ADB0F7DF0D69EBA31C9F9F005C60C993945EBD33
          Test case 87-RC-06
          Seed: 2EB7676D4A28700DA7772A7A035EB495CAA6F842352A74824EF5FD891BC38B2A
          Hash of Keys: D5B73703A1DDC5BCB0D14AE39B193A25D6ADA6535827973181ADB0BE70435A5B
          Message: C2B3A0AC483A5517682285C205974B2A506946448A8F7D3E1934C155EFDFE922
          Hash of sig: 375D598704B722C8A1FEF1626FD7738A532C06329AA4217357460E3B729660F8
          Test case 87-RC-07
          Seed: E4E80CCE8B26DF1B02B99949851EE2F907FE4F0CC34790352C76D5D91634D073
          Hash of Keys: 84B7E61684A12698400B09EA332EA3C4FBCFA47FE37FD6AE725CBC5FA8A99D3F
          Message: 89E6AB43C9CB1CC59C3986D53217A558357E62102A26F666F2B64CD1DBB7A536
          Hash of sig: 7C4AABD163CAEF8F6EBFDA3E3EEBC0A9604675B0E991ABAFD284F1AE8BA07B2A
          Test case 87-RC-08
          Seed: 5787262B803499223D4E5A8C1EE572E89F7A69B359B3F8505355B0BDEAB95E5C
          Hash of Keys: 85AE1DE605A7B479C02730BF4B7DD6D0FD8FFE5C980893CA6DAD00BD8BD1CE68
          Message: D3230C4E061964BBFB17702432D5D36FC1EB3D1068F8CCAA84044776E3B5CC55
          Hash of sig: D3ABE460EE2DD9595F413CFE2780A319E4E4DFD6592995298A7AB0B82A5E2815
          Test case 87-RC-09
          Seed: CE099B99330537DD153052243FC32ACAD509A126AB982410258858567D410D79
          Hash of Keys: E04A9F15EDF8F078EB336CE624249EF2A8EDF2CDBF6A8276E9F5E92ED9B0BAE8
          Message: 0035931762665F561A1B22176567E3B10FDE2441521F77030733A8E39312EEEE
          Hash of sig: 3EEF413CB5EB179896ECA172D0DBFB9B251545DC561D61580BD5BBC8B6D734E1
          Test case 87-RC-10
          Seed: FC8F2929878CBD81E1CCC23913F290380120C043A4A8A251AEEBF09705B8E590
          Hash of Keys: 7E2ECCA86F532E8E8092FEBB6E0007F92E7909AD2BCBE2E02AB375DAC9969E5E
          Message: D3C28875D2671C0EF23BFDC8869E8ECF8868D3F0561C3134D254F7479D0CE0E5
          Hash of sig: EB69A908EDCC04320A0B61AD57E21B044465F2037698636B64229CF2DB259789
        • Test FCS_COP.1/SigGen:7:

          Known Answer Test for Large Number of Rejection Cases (Total Rejection Count)

          111. For each supported parameter set, the evaluator shall cause the TOE to generate signatures using the data below and a deterministic seed of all 0’s. Correctness is determined by comparing the hash of the resulting signature with the hash in the fourth row of the corresponding test case below.

          ML-DSA-87 Test Cases for Total Rejection Count

          Test case 87-LN-01 
          Seed: 98B6298051D92BF37293C93C97370747BF527B87B71F6C4264182F45155ADE4C 
          Hash of Keys: 04A135B5C9B7020332C7B16E7108E8FF7FC1EAE1C23C5FA0B5D5CED0FEEE7424 
          Message: D7B0341269259083ABF3C8DC47559A19D57669B4486E0224F376DC43E577A3D8 
          Hash of sig: 58D72D76EC0FB65BFB9893C4479366B79DD7B8B7577E4291D13514FCC76C26DD
          Test case 87-LN-02
          Seed: DFB5BDD90F58571DCA962426C623F13D046BBE814D183886AC90D143EAD725A7 
          Hash of Keys: 2B6AB8CFCCCC41F759CAF01932E9413F5DC6D949BC827F739866929683FB155E 
          Message: 21005DB2B583CC826A9684BFFD0EE00AB97E0479FE4A1D266699337540145778 
          Hash of sig: C93EA34E00FFFFC3ECEA072D5FB038A83B5539CAF7B831AEDCFA785E50B3CA5E
          Test case 87-LN-03 
          Seed: 5AD414E0DD0EF2FE685F342871875FDF06F503717A86C3B3466565ADD2096417 
          Hash of Keys: BD9C2D52F3FC78DB17E682DA2E78947ECFC0898333838D60C892700B2B0DDA9F 
          Message: 29139C279816B25F2D6BB52C8247D163544F7BA332C3CF63359B9E23FBC56515 
          Hash of sig: DB4BE2DE19FB40437BDB7E9B6578D665DB05B4E88C16907DF4546EBA9BE03AEA
          Test case 87-LN-04 
          Seed: 484DD2F406A4D15F49A91AD5FC3BDC1D0FF253622EB68F83D6E1C870D0E89E29 
          Hash of Keys: A719DC9A77C91C46295555C2353BA0CBEA513DA9A92A5C34D2E949EFF46A12D8 
          Message: 6AD6E959F0EA60126364FB7C95FA71133F246A9265A11B4965EE78AB0CB5AF0E 
          Hash of sig: 5050D7A665074EC63D9F3966C1F01A1BFB18F9E83AE0B09F838BC1E2342ED6F4
          Test case 87-LN-05
          Seed: B25C1816F82D59940D5CB829BAC364AAD013C4C16415CE1CF6DCC2F15199B391 
          Hash of Keys: ADBB2CD43F222640BD9FF4E61C80E63853E8DC1F759C581B7447C9C166EAA38E 
          Message: 824E47322895BFFE37B6B4AFC41CF6115C07EEC0C24EB81076C87A1B01AE8617 
          Hash of sig: 667ADA46073BC69D64DC47BB9A76DD0D78302E7415D87D5E816B05FB95F9E84D
          Test case 87-LN-06 
          Seed: B2CE72B3560AF07E06465881F56ADA00262BA708D87B73F39E04E310F3B8A3E9 
          Hash of Keys: FD9C4AC53AE803242A62DF933B8E8BAD6CE5207AC4A73683B6D9383B5E70B17A 
          Message: A1501CC84C917E0D2D7C27C2AC382220BD8FFFE807DB38E37A9E429EC2781911 
          Hash of sig: 779553B195E11558EE59EF3942F5F6B446A2144600D1F4F50B300C6C56504760
          Test case 87-LN-07 
          Seed: AB01D0E591B7DDCD3C03395AED808FA2763C0A486D44119D621BE0FD0B022B25 
          Hash of Keys: 93B6ADE34F78A4ADB36B2F6D2C51DB793E659E1243E80488AE1C03B65125D6D7 
          Message: 8DE8122D89D15FE84A4C34F6B59B2C4B11F33B6A053154D199B634F557FDF5F6 
          Hash of sig: 0483045999A79B583F403DB96A736F0F0B24E2DFBC4E5CFA9B50E3D910786F07
          Test case 87-LN-08 
          Seed: 15D60D3693762F82C9AC1DCB0576936651AC81D863842EDB91109C8EE83AE705
          Hash of Keys: 2DF544E2E939AA717741C2437288FAEB308DEB8FF37A2652FAE34BAE8B84D779 
          Message: F05946A6113905C34163AEF2246FD69016CE24A7BA40F8E7E42EDAC2D0A44605 
          Hash of sig: F8383917AF79C8E540D2356AB05F08B465BF32DFEC444B787CE31BF48CC6C3DD
          Test case 87-LN-09 
          Seed: 21212285BED53B3411705DAF5F3BDDB6F0618EB571B36EE11A74053407A269F5 
          Hash of Keys: 737061155A9A03F11F9FEBBB940BED4DD54542C4A6212F89A5EB4EC2BE542782 
          Message: FFE38246BF3DEFD9CAD15CC17CEA511C067D582E04227B479E32F9197CF91482 
          Hash of sig: C4C12C58032052FB2D21F0C6A7388A63154FB85B74287D2859DE6C1C6F7F277B
          Test case 87-LN-10 
          Seed: A2744470587C71BA43EC26DC390CE3531978F315993C653E5D3EFD2849D5D9F1 
          Hash of Keys: B1BF37BFFB11531B6ADD697870D7DB2E2462D0A97A63F09C1D0038457C6D795A 
          Message: 9831A830231A160B9847203341A5F30BF3E87A2A482AEEA6886315C92B5C4E4C 
          Hash of sig: 46C669D2FEB643A38E54FF87B790CC33F44043A1B6B31DB9474D301328CA2A7F
        • Test FCS_COP.1/SigGen:8:

          XMSS Signature Generation

          112. To test the TOE’s ability to generate digital signatures using XMSS, the evaluator shall perform the XMSS Key Generation Test using the following input parameters:

          • Hash algorithm [SHA-256/192, SHAKE256/192, SHA-256, SHAKE256]

          • Tree height [10, 16, 20]

          XMSS Key Generation Test

          113. For each supported combination of the above parameters, the evaluator shall generate 10 signatures. The evaluator shall verify the correctness of the implementation by comparing values generated by the TOE with those generated by a known-good implementation using the same input parameters.

        FCS_COP.1/SigVer Cryptographic Operation - Signature Verification

        The TSF shall perform [digital signature verification] in accordance with a specified cryptographic algorithm [selection: Cryptographic algorithm] and cryptographic key sizes [selection: Cryptographic key sizes] that meet the following: [selection: List of standards] .

        The following table provides the allowable choices for completion of the selection operations of FCS_COP.1/SigVer.
        Table 7: Allowable choices for FCS_COP.1/SigVer
        Identifier Cryptographic algorithm Cryptographic key sizes List of standards
        RSA-PKCSRSASSA-PKCS1-v1_5Modulus of size [selection: 2048, 3072, 4096, 6144, 8192] bits and hash [selection: SHA-256, SHA-384, SHA-512]RFC 8017 (Section 8.2) [PKCS #1 v2.2]

        FIPS PUB 186-5 (Section 5.4) [RSASSA-PKCS1-v1_5]
        RSA-PSSRSASSA-PSSModulus of size [selection: 2048, 3072, 4096, 6144, 8192] bits and hash [selection: SHA-256, SHA-384, SHA-512]RFC 8017 (Section 8.1) [PKCS#1 v2.2]

        FIPS PUB 186-5 (Section 5.4) [RSASSA-PSS]
        ECDSAECDSAElliptic Curve [selection: P-256, P-384, P-521] using hash [selection: SHA-256, SHA-384, SHA-512][selection: ISO/IEC 14888-3:2018 (Subclause 6.6), FIPS PUB 186-5 (Section 6.4.2)] [ECDSA]

        NIST SP-800 186 (Section 4) [NIST Curves]
        LMSLMSPrivate key size = [selection:
        • 192 bits with [selection: SHA-256/192, SHAKE256/192]
        • 256 bits with [selection: SHA-256, SHAKE256]
        ]

        Winternitz parameter = [selection: 1, 2, 4, 8]

        Tree height = [selection: 5, 10, 15, 20, 25]
        RFC 8554 [LMS]

        NIST SP 800-208 [parameters]
        XMSSXMSSPrivate key size = [selection:
        • 192 bits with [selection: SHA-256/192, SHAKE256/192]
        • 256 bits with [selection: SHA-256, SHAKE256]
        ]

        Tree height = [selection: 10, 16, 20]
        RFC 8391 [XMSS]

        NIST SP 800-208 [parameters]
        ML-DSAML-DSA Signature VerificationParameter set = ML-DSA-87NIST FIPS 204 (Section 5.3)
        Application Note:

        Application Note 17

        The ST Author should choose the algorithm implemented to perform verification of digital signatures. For the algorithm chosen, the ST Author should make the appropriate assignments/selections to specify the parameters that are implemented for that algorithm. In particular, if ECDSA is selected as one of the signature algorithms, the key size specified must match the selection for the curve used in the algorithm.

        If LMS or XMSS is selected, then FCS_COP.1/XOF from Annex B must be included.

        1. The evaluator shall examine the TSS to verify that any one-time values such as nonces or masks are constructed and used in accordance with the relevant standards.

        Guidance

        115. There are no additional Guidance evaluation activities for this component.

        Tests
        1. The following tests are conditional based on the selections made in the SFR. The evaluator shall perform the following test or witness respective tests executed by the developer. The tests must be executed on a platform that is as close as practically possible to the operational platform (but which may be instrumented in terms of, for example, use of a debug mode). Where the test is not carried out on the TOE itself, the test platform shall be identified and the differences between test environment and TOE execution environment shall be described.






        • Test FCS_COP.1/SigVer:1:

          RSA-PKCS Signature Verification

          117. To test the TOE’s ability to perform RSA Digital Signature Verification using PKCS1-v1,5 signature type, the evaluator shall perform the Generated Data Test using the following input parameters:

          • Modulus size [2048, 3072, 4096, 6144, 8192] bits

          • Hash algorithm [SHA-256, SHA-384, SHA-512]

          Generated Data Test

          118. For each supported combination of the above parameters, the evaluator shall cause the TOE to generate six test cases using a random message and its signature such that the test cases are modified as follows:

          • One test case is left unmodified

          • For one test case the Message is modified

          • For one test case the Signature is modified

          • For one test case the exponent (e) is modified

          • For one test case the IR is moved

          • For one test case the Trailer is moved

          119. The TOE must correctly verify the unmodified signatures and fail to verify the modified signatures.

        • Test FCS_COP.1/SigVer:2:

          RSA-PSS Signature Verification

          120. To test the TOE’s ability to perform RSA Digital Signature Verification using PSS signature type, the evaluator shall perform the Generated Data Test using the following input parameters:

          • Modulus size [2048, 3072, 4096, 6144, 8192] bits

          • Hash algorithm [SHA-256, SHA-384, SHA-512]

          • Salt length [Fixed based on implementation]

          • Mask function [MGF1]

          Generated Data Test

          121. For each supported combination of the above parameters, the evaluator shall cause the TOE to generate six test cases using random data such that the test cases are modified as follows:

          • One test case is left unmodified

          • For one test case the Message is modified

          • For one test case the Signature is modified

          • For one test case the exponent (e) is modified

          • For one test case the IR is moved

          • For one test case the Trailer is moved

          122. The TOE must correctly verify the unmodified signatures and fail to verify the modified signatures.

        • Test FCS_COP.1/SigVer:3:

          ECDSA Signature Verification

          123. To test the TOE’s ability to perform ECDSA Digital Signature Verification, the evaluator shall perform the Algorithm Functional Test using the following input parameters:

          • Elliptic Curve [P-256, P-384, P-521]

          • Hash algorithm [SHA-256, SHA-384, SHA-512]

          Algorithm Functional Test

          124. For each supported combination of the above parameters, the evaluator shall cause the TOE to generate test cases consisting of messages and signatures such that the 21 test cases are modified as follows:

          • Three test cases are left unmodified

          • For three test cases the Message is modified

          • For three test cases the key is modified

          • For three test cases the r value is modified

          • For three test cases the s value is modified

          • For three test cases the value r is zeroed

          • For three test cases the value s is zeroed

          125. The TOE must correctly verify the unmodified signatures and fail to verify the modified signatures.

        • Test FCS_COP.1/SigVer:4:

          LMS Signature Verification

          126. To test the TOE’s ability to verify cryptographic digital signature using LMS, the evaluator shall perform the Algorithm Functional Test using the following input parameters

          • Hash algorithm [SHA-256/192, SHAKE256/192, SHA-256, SHAKE256]

          • Winternitz[1, 2, 4, 8]

          • Tree height [5, 10, 15, 20, 25]

          Algorithm Functional Test

          127. For each supported combination of the above parameters, the evaluator shall generate 4 test cases consisting of signed messages and keys, such that

          • One test case is unmodified (i.e. correct)

          • For one test case modify the message, i.e. the message is different

          • For one test case modify the signature, i.e. signature is different

          • For one test case modify the signature header so that it is a valid header for a different LMS parameter set.

          128. The TOE must correctly verify the unmodified test case and fail to verify the modified test cases.

        • Test FCS_COP.1/SigVer:5:

          XMSS Signature Verification

          129. To test the TOE’s ability to verify digital signatures using XMSS or XMSS MT, the evaluator shall perform the XMSS digital signature verification test using the following input parameters:

          • Hash algorithm [SHA-256/192, SHAKE256/192, SHA-256, SHAKE256]

          • Tree height [10, 16, 20]

          XMSS Digital Signature Verification Test

          130. For each supported combination of the above parameters, the evaluator shall generate four test cases consisting of signed messages and keys, such that

          • One test case is unmodified (i.e. correct)

          • For one test case modify the message, i.e. the message is different

          • For one test case modify the signature, i.e. signature is different

          • For one test case modify the signature header so that it is a valid header for a different XMSS parameter set

          131. The evaluator shall verify the correctness of the implementation by verifying that the TOE correctly verifies the unmodified test case and fails to verify the modified test cases

        • Test FCS_COP.1/SigVer:6:

          ML-DSA Signature Verification

          132. To test the TOE’s ability to validate digital signatures using ML-DSA, the evaluator shall perform the Algorithm Functional Test using the following input parameters:

          • Parameter set [ML-DSA-87]

          • Previously generated signed Message [8-65535] bytes

          • Mu value (if generated externally)

          • Context (for external interface testing)

          • Previously generated Public key (pk)

          • Previously generated Signature

          Algorithm Functional Test

          133. For each combination of supported parameter set and capabilities, the evaluator shall require the implementation under test to validate 15 signatures. Each group of 15 test cases is modified as follows:

          • Three test cases are left unmodified

          • For three test cases the Signed message is modified

          • For three test cases the component of the signature that commits the signer to the message is modified

          • For three test cases the component of the signature that allows the verifier to construct the vector z is modified

          • For three test cases the component of the signature that allows the verifier to construct the hint array is modified

          134. The TOE must correctly verify the unmodified signatures and fail to verify the modified signatures.

        FCS_RBG.1 Random Bit Generation

        The TSF shall perform deterministic random bit generation services using [selection: DRBG Algorithm] in accordance with [selection: List of Standards] after initialization.

        The following table provides the allowable choices for completion of the selection operations of FCS_RBG.1.1.
        Table 8: Allowable choices for FCS_RBG.1.1
        Identifier DRBG Algorithm List of Standards
        HASH_DRBGHash_DRBG with [selection: SHA-256, SHA-384, SHA-512, SHA3-256, SHA3-384, SHA3-512] [selection: ISO/IEC 18031: 2011 (Section C.2.2), NIST SP 800-90A Revision 1 Section 10.1.1]
        HMAC_DRBGHMAC_DRBG with [selection: SHA-256, SHA-384, SHA-512, SHA3-256, SHA3-384, SHA3-512] [selection: ISO/IEC 18031: 2011 (Section C.2.3), NIST SP 800-90A Revision 1 Section 10.1.2]
        CTR_DRBGCTR_DRBG with [selection: AES-128, AES-192, AES-256] [selection: ISO/IEC 18031: 2011 (Section C.3.2), NIST SP800-90A Revision 1 Section 10.2.1]
        The TSF shall use a [selection: TSF entropy source [assignment: name of entropy source], multiple TSF entropy sources [assignment: name of entropy sources], TSF interface for seeding] for initialized seeding.
        Application Note:

        Application Note 20

        For the selection in this requirement, the ST author selects "TSF entropy source" if a single entropy source is used as input to the DRBG. The ST author selects "multiple TSF entropy sources" if a seed is formed from a combination of two or more entropy sources within the TOE boundary. If the TSF implements two or more separate DRBGs that are seeded in separate manners, this SFR should be iterated for each DRBG. If multiple distinct entropy sources exist such that each DRBG only uses one of them, then each iteration would select "TSF entropy source"; "multiple TSF entropy sources" is only selected if a single DRBG uses multiple entropy sources for its seed. The ST author selects "TSF interface for seeding" if entropy source data is generated outside the TOE boundary.

        If "TSF entropy source" is selected in FCS_RBG.1.2, FCS_RBG.3 must be claimed from Annex B.

        If "multiple TSF entropy sources" is selected in FCS_RBG.1.2, FCS_RBG.4 and FCS_RBG.5 must be claimed from Annex B.

        If "TSF interface for seeding" is selected in FCS_RBG.1.2, FCS_RBG.2 must be claimed from Annex B.

        The TSF shall update the DRBG state by [selection: reseeding, uninstantiating and re-instantiating] using a [selection: TSF entropy source [assignment: name of entropy source], multiple TSF entropy sources [assignment: name of entropy sources], TSF interface for obtaining entropy [assignment: name of the interface]] in the following situations: [selection: never, on demand, on the condition: [assignment: condition], after [assignment: time]] in accordance with [assignment: list of standards].
        Application Note:

        Application Note 21

        If a reseeding is selected in the first selection of FCS_RBG.1.2 and something other than “never” is selected in the third selection of FCS_RBG.1.3, but reseeding is not feasible, the TSF will uninstantiate RBGs, rather than produce output that is of insufficient quality. The listed standards should specify the reseed interval and procedure for uninstantiating and reseeding. The remaining selection allows the PP Author to require application-specific conditions for reseeding.

        “Uninstantiate” means that the internal state of the DRBG is no longer available for use. In the second selection of FCS_RBG.1.3, “on demand” means that a TOE presents an interface to reseed as a TSFI (e.g., an API call). The interface causes the DRBG to reseed at the request of an authorised user, either with an internal source, an external source, or from input provided through the TSFI (e.g., the API call).

        The list of standards selected in the last assignment should be consistent with the standards selected in FCS_RBG.1.1

        164. Documentation shall be produced—and the evaluator shall perform the activities—in accordance with Annex D of [NDcPP].

        There are no additional TSS evaluation activities for this component.

        166. There are no additional TSS evaluation activities for this element.

        167. The evaluator shall verify that the TSS identifies how the DRBG state is updated, and the situations under which this may occur.

        Guidance
        There are no additional Guidance evaluation activities for this component.

        169. There are no additional Guidance evaluation activities for this element.

        170. If the ST claims that the DRBG state can be updated on demand, the evaluator shall verify that the operational guidance has instructions for how to perform this operation.

        Tests
        There are no test activities for this component.

        175. There are no test activities for this element.

        176. There are no test activities for this element.

        165. The evaluator shall examine the TSS to determine it identifies the DRBGs used by the TOE.

        Guidance

        168. If the DRBG functionality is configurable, the evaluator shall verify that the operational guidance includes instructions on how to configure this behaviour.

        Tests

        171. The evaluator shall perform 15 trials for the RNG implementation. If the RNG is configurable, the evaluator shall perform 15 trials for each configuration.

        172. If the RNG has prediction resistance enabled, each trial consists of (1) instantiate DRBG, (2) generate the first block of random bits (3) generate a second block of random bits (4) uninstantiate. The evaluator shall verify that the second block of random bits is the expected value. The evaluator shall generate eight input values for each trial. The first is a count (0 – 14). The next three are entropy input, nonce, and personalization string for the instantiate operation. The next two are additional input and entropy input for the first call to generate. The final two are additional input and entropy input for the second call to generate. These values are randomly generated. “generate one block of random bits” means to generate random bits with number of returned bits equal to the Output Block Length (as defined in NIST SP800-90A).

        173. If the RNG does not have prediction resistance, each trial consists of (1) instantiate DRBG, (2) generate the first block of random bits (3) reseed, (4) generate a second block of random bits (5) uninstantiate. The evaluator shall verify that the second block of random bits is the expected value. The evaluator shall generate eight input values for each trial. The first is a count (0 – 14). The next three are entropy input, nonce, and personalization string for the instantiate operation. The fifth value is additional input to the first call to generate. The sixth and seventh are additional input and entropy input to the call to reseed. The final value is additional input to the second generate call.

        174. The following paragraphs contain more information on some of the input values to be generated/selected by the evaluator.

        • Entropy input: the length of the entropy input value must equal the seed length.

        • Nonce: If a nonce is supported (CTR_DRBG with no Derivation Function does not use a nonce), the nonce bit length is one-half the seed length.

        • Personalization string: The length of the personalization string must be ≤ seed length. If the implementation only supports one personalization string length, then the same length can be used for both values. If more than one string length is support, the evaluator shall use personalization strings of two different lengths. If the implementation does not use a personalization string, no value needs to be supplied.

        • Additional input: the additional input bit lengths have the same defaults and restrictions as the personalization string lengths.

        5.1.4 Identification and Authentication (FIA)

        FIA_UIA_EXT.1 User Identification and Authentication

        The TSF shall allow the following actions prior to requiring the non-TOE entity to initiate the identification and authentication process:

        • Display the warning banner in accordance with FTA_TAB.1;

        • [selection: no other actions, automated generation of cryptographic keys, [assignment: list of services, actions performed by the TSF in response to non-TOE requests]].
        The TSF shall require each administrative user to be successfully identified and authenticated before allowing any other TSF-mediated actions on behalf of that administrative user.
        Application Note:

        Application Note 22

        This requirement applies to Administrators and external IT entities of services available from the TOE directly and not services available by connecting through the TOE. While it should be the case that few or no services are available to external entities prior to identification and authentication, if there are some available (perhaps ICMP echo) these should be listed in the assignment statement; if automated generation of cryptographic keys is supported without administrator authentication, the option "automated generation of cryptographic keys" should be selected; otherwise, the option “no other actions” should be selected.

        The TSF shall provide the following remote authentication mechanisms [selection: Web GUI password, SSH password, SSH public key, X.509 certificate] and [selection: no other mechanism, external authentication server].The TSF shall provide the following local authentication mechanisms: [selection: none, password-based, [assignment: other authentication mechanism]].
        Application Note:

        Application Note 23

        An authentication process consists of two basic steps: identification step (presenting the claimed attribute value (e.g., a user identifier) to the authentication subsystem); verification step (presenting or generating authentication information (e.g., a value signed with a private key) that acts as evidence to prove the binding between the attribute and that for which it is claimed).

        Remote authentication is when a user associated with the Security Administrator role remotely communicates with the TOE for the purpose of security management over a cryptographic protocol specified in FTP_TRP.1/Admin. Local authentication mechanisms are defined as those that occur at a local administrative interface using a console. If no local authentication mechanism is supported by the TOE, the ST author should select "none" from the final selection. See Application Note 26 for examples of compliant local administrative interfaces.

        Local administration is defined as administration using a dedicated physical interface that (from the TOE’s point of view) is directly connected to the device(s) the administrator interacts with and therefore falls under the physical protection (OE.PHYSICAL). Any administrator choice to extend a local console so it is remotely accessible (e.g., console server or remote KVM) is outside the scope of the NDcPP. The following are examples of compliant local administrative interfaces:

        a. RS-232 terminal.

        b. Peripherals (e.g., keyboard, monitor, mouse).

        The TOE must support at least one authentication mechanism where the verification step is processed locally, as such “external authentication server” should not be the only available authentication method.

        The ST author selects the authentication mechanisms necessary to support remote administration. If "Web GUI password" or "SSH password" is selected for remote authentication mechanism the ST author specifies an appropriate cryptographic protocol in FTP_TRP.1/Admin (e.g., "HTTPS" or "SSH") and includes FIA_AFL.1, FIA_PMG_EXT.1, FPT_APW_EXT.1 from Annex B.

        If integration with an external X.500 Directory is supported and enabled, the "external authentication server" must be selected and an appropriate cryptographic protocol with each "authentication server" must be selected in FTP_ITC.1. Since the identity verification step is performed remotely, FIA_AFL.1, FIA_PMG_EXT.1, FPT_APW_EXT.1 requirements are not enforced by the TOE and therefore are not applicable to the “external authentication server” selection.

        The TSF shall authenticate any administrative user’s claimed identity according to each authentication mechanism specified in FIA_UIA_EXT.1.3.
        Application Note:

        Application Note 24

        According to the application note for FMT_SMR.2, for distributed TOEs at least one TOE component has to support the authentication of Security Administrators according to FIA_UIA_EXT.1.3 and FIA_UIA_EXT.1.4 but not necessarily all TOE components. In case not all TOE components support this way of authentication for Security Administrators the TSS must describe how Security Administrators are authenticated and identified.

        Something

        177. The evaluator shall examine the TSS to determine that it describes the logon process for remote authentication mechanism (e.g., SSH public key, Web GUI password, etc.) and optional local authentication mechanisms supported by the TOE. This description shall contain information pertaining to the credentials allowed/used, any protocol transactions that take place, and what constitutes a “successful logon”.

        178. The evaluator shall examine the TSS to determine that it describes which actions are allowed before administrator identification and authentication. The description shall cover authentication and identification for local and remote TOE administration.

        179. For distributed TOEs, the evaluator shall examine that the TSS details how Security Administrators are authenticated and identified by all TOE components. If not all TOE components support authentication of Security Administrators according to FIA_UIA_EXT.1, the TSS shall describe how the overall TOE functionality is split between TOE components including how it is ensured that no unauthorised access to any TOE component can occur.

        180. For distributed TOEs, the evaluator shall examine the TSS to determine that it describes, for each TOE component, which actions are allowed before administrator identification and authentication. The description shall cover authentication and identification for remote TOE administration and optionally for local TOE administration if claimed by the ST author. For each TOE component that does not support authentication of Security Administrators according to FIA_UIA_EXT.1, the TSS shall describe any unauthenticated services/services that are supported by the component.

        Guidance

        181. The evaluator shall examine the guidance documentation to determine that any necessary preparatory steps (e.g., establishing credential material such as pre- shared keys, tunnels, certificates, etc.) to logging in are described. For each supported login method, the evaluator shall ensure the guidance documentation provides clear instructions for successfully logging on. If configuration is necessary to ensure the services provided before login are limited, the evaluator shall determine that the guidance documentation provides sufficient instruction on limiting the allowed services.

        Tests

        182. The evaluator shall perform the following tests for each method by which administrators access the TOE (local and remote), as well as for each type of credential supported by the login method:




        • Test FIA_UIA_EXT.1:1:

          Test 1: The evaluator shall use the guidance documentation to configure the appropriate credential supported for the login method. For all combinations of supported credentials and login methods, the evaluator shall show that providing correct I&A information results in the ability to access the system, while providing incorrect information results in denial of access.

        • Test FIA_UIA_EXT.1:2:

          Test 2: The evaluator shall configure the services allowed (if any) according to the guidance documentation, and then determine the services available to an external remote entity. The evaluator shall determine that the list of services available is limited to those specified in the requirement.

        • Test FIA_UIA_EXT.1:3:

          Test 3: For local access, the evaluator shall determine what services are available to a local administrator prior to logging in, and make sure this list is consistent with the requirement.

        • Test FIA_UIA_EXT.1:4:

          Test 4: For distributed TOEs, where not all TOE components support the authentication of Security Administrators according to FIA_UIA_EXT.1, the evaluator shall test that the components authenticate Security Administrators as described in the TSS.

        5.1.5 Security Management (FMT)

        General Requirements for Distributed TOEs

        For distributed TOEs, the evaluation activities defined in this chapter shall be performed.

        TSS

        183. For distributed TOEs, the evaluator shall verify that the TSS describes how every function related to security management is realized for every TOE component and shared between different TOE components. The evaluator shall confirm that all relevant aspects of each TOE component are covered by the FMT SFRs.

        Guidance Documentation

        184. For distributed TOEs, the evaluator shall verify that the Guidance Documentation describes management of each TOE component. The evaluator shall confirm that all relevant aspects of each TOE component are covered by the FMT SFRs.

        Tests

        185. Tests defined to verify the correct implementation of security management functions shall be performed for every TOE component. For security management functions that are implemented centrally, sampling should be applied when defining the evaluator’s tests (ensuring that all components are covered by the sample).

        FMT_MOF.1/ManualUpdate Management of Security Functions Behaviour

        The TSF shall restrict the ability to enable the functions to perform manual updates to Security Administrators.

        Application Note:

        Application Note 25

        FMT_MOF.1/ManualUpdate restricts the initiation of manual updates to Security Administrators.

        186. For distributed TOEs, see FMT introduction. There are no specific requirements for non-distributed TOEs.

        Guidance

        187. The evaluator shall examine the guidance documentation to determine that any necessary steps to perform manual update are described. The guidance documentation shall also provide warnings regarding functions that may cease to operate during the update (if applicable).

        188. For distributed TOEs, the guidance documentation shall describe all steps for how to update all TOE components. This shall contain a description of the order in which components need to be updated if the order is relevant to the update process. The guidance documentation shall also provide warnings regarding functions of TOE components and the overall TOE that may cease to operate during the update (if applicable).

        Tests

        189. The evaluator shall perform the following tests:


        • Test FMT_MOF.1/ManualUpdate:1:

          Test 1: The evaluator shall try to perform the update using a legitimate update image without prior authentication as Security Administrator (either by authentication as a user with no administrator privileges or without user authentication at all – depending on the configuration of the TOE). The attempt to update the TOE shall fail.

        • Test FMT_MOF.1/ManualUpdate:2:

          Test 2: The evaluator shall try to perform the update with prior authentication as Security Administrator using a legitimate update image. This attempt should be successful. This test case is covered by Test 1 for FPT_TUD_EXT.1.

        FMT_MTD.1/CoreData Management of TSF Data

        The TSF shall restrict the ability to manage the TSF data to Security Administrators.

        Application Note:

        Application Note 26

        The word ‘manage’ includes but is not limited to create, initialize, view, change default, modify, delete, clear, and append. This SFR includes also the resetting of administrative passwords by the Security Administrator. The identifier ‘CoreData’ has been added here to separate this iteration of FMT_MTD.1 from the optional iteration of FMT_MTD.1 defined in Annex A.4.2.1 (FMT_MTD.1/CryptoKeys).

        190. For each administrative function identified in the guidance documentation that is accessible through an interface prior to administrator log-in, the evaluator shall confirm that the TSS details how the ability to manipulate the TSF data through these interfaces is disallowed for non-administrative users.

        191. If the TOE supports handling of X.509v3 certificates and implements a trust store, the evaluator shall examine the TSS to determine that it contains sufficient information to describe how the ability to manage the TOE’s trust store is restricted.

        Guidance

        192. The evaluator shall review the guidance documentation to determine that each of the TSF-data-manipulating functions implemented in response to the requirements of the cPP is identified, and that configuration information is provided to ensure that only administrators have access to the functions.

        193. If the TOE supports handling of X.509v3 certificates and provides a trust store, the evaluator shall review the guidance documentation to determine that it provides sufficient information for the administrator to configure and maintain the trust store in a secure way. If the TOE supports loading of CA certificates, the evaluator shall review the guidance documentation to determine that it provides sufficient information for the administrator to securely load CA certificates into the trust store. The evaluator shall also review the guidance documentation to determine that it explains how to designate a CA certificate a trust anchor.

        Tests

        194. No separate testing for FMT_MTD.1/CoreData is required unless one of the management functions has not already been exercised under any other SFR.

        FMT_SMF.1 Specification of Management Functions

        The TSF shall be capable of performing the following management functions:
        • Ability to administer the TOE remotely;

        • Ability to configure the access banner;

        • Ability to configure the remote session inactivity time before session termination;

        • Ability to update the TOE, and to verify the updates using digital signature capability prior to installing those updates;

        [selection: Ability to start and stop services, Ability to configure local audit behaviour (e.g. changes to storage locations for audit; changes to behaviour when local audit storage space is full; changes to local audit storage size), Ability to modify the behaviour of the transmission of audit data to an external IT entity, Ability to configure the list of TOE-provided services available before an entity is identified and authenticated, as specified in FIA_UIA_EXT.1, Ability to manage the cryptographic keys, Ability to configure the cryptographic functionality, Ability to configure thresholds for SSH rekeying, Ability to configure the lifetime for IPsec SAs, Ability to configure the list of supported (D)TLS ciphers, Ability to configure the interaction between TOE components, Ability to enable or disable automatic checking for updates or automatic updates, Ability to re-enable an Administrator account, Ability to set the time which is used for time-stamps, Ability to configure NTP, Ability to configure the reference identifier for the peer, Ability to manage the TOE’s trust store and designate X509.v3 certificates as trust anchors, Ability to generate Certificate Signing Request (CSR) and process CA certificate response, Ability to administer the TOE locally, Ability to configure the local session inactivity time before session termination or locking, Ability to configure the authentication failure parameters for FIA_AFL.1, Ability to manage the trusted public keys database, Ability to manage the public key or certificate used to validate the digital update, No other capabilities] Status Markers:
        - undefined

        #Management FunctionStatus
        Application Note:

        Application Note 27

        FMT_SMF.1.1 Management Function

        Management Function Guidance

        Ability to administer the TOE remotely

        The TOE must provide functionality for remote administration. Local administration is optional. This cPP does not mandate a specific security management function to be available either through the local administration interface, the remote administration interface or both. Remote administrative sessions are specified in FTP_TRP.1/Admin.

        Ability to configure the access banner

        The TOE must provide functionality to configure the access banner for FTA_TAB.1 and the session inactivity time(s) for FTA_SSL.3 and (if included) FTA_SSL_EXT.1, though an access banner is only required for each interactive (human-computer) interface (HCI), not for any programmatic interface [application programming interface (API), e.g., REST API].

        Ability to configure the remote session inactivity time before session termination

        The TOE must provide functionality to configure the access banner for FTA_TAB.1 and the session inactivity time(s) for FTA_SSL.3 and (if included) FTA_SSL_EXT.1, though an access banner is only required for each interactive (human-computer) interface (HCI), not for any programmatic interface [application programming interface (API), e.g., REST API].

        Ability to update the TOE, and to verify the updates using digital signature capability prior to installing those updates

        The option “Ability to update the TOE, and to verify the updates using digital signature capability prior to installing those updates” includes the relevant management functions from FMT_MOF.1/ManualUpdate and FPT_TUD_EXT.1. Based on selections in FPT_TUD_EXT.1.2, FMT_MOF.1/AutoUpdate must be included if the option “Ability to enable or disable automatic checking for updates or automatic updates” is included in the ST.

        Ability to start and stop services

        The selection "Ability to start and stop services" should be included in the ST if the TOE supports starting and stopping services of the TOE. If this selection is included in the ST, FMT_MOF.1/Services must be claimed in the ST.

        Ability to configure local audit behaviour (e.g., changes to storage locations for audit; changes to behaviour when local audit storage space is full; changes to local audit storage size)

        The selection “Ability to configure local audit behaviour” includes the relevant management functions from FMT_MOF.1/Services and FMT_MOF.1/Functions, (for all of these SFRs that are included in the ST) and is intended to cover security relevant configuration options (if any) to the audit behaviour (like changes to the behaviour when the local audit storage space is full). The option "Ability to modify the behaviour of the transmission of audit data to an external IT entity" is intended to cover the management functionalities related to the transmission of local audit information to an external IT entity.

        Ability to modify the behaviour of the transmission of audit data to an external IT entity

        The option "Ability to modify the behaviour of the transmission of audit data to an external IT entity" is intended to cover the management functionalities related to the transmission of local audit information to an external IT entity.

        Ability to configure the list of TOE-provided services available before an entity is identified and authenticated, as specified in FIA_UIA_EXT.1

        The selection "Ability to configure the list of TOEprovided services available before an entity is identified and authenticated, as specified in FIA_UIA_EXT.1" should be included in the ST if the TOE supports configuration of the list of TOE-provided services which are available before any entity is identified and authenticated. The term 'list' refers to the resulting list of available services as a result of the configuration activities. The configuration activity itself does not necessarily have to be modification of a list but could be any type of activation and deactivation procedure.

        Ability to manage the cryptographic keys

        The selection "Ability to manage the cryptographic keys" should be included in the ST if the TOE supports management of cryptographic keys (e.g., generation of cryptographic keys). If this selection is included in the ST, FMT_MTD.1/CryptoKeys must be claimed in the ST.

        Ability to configure the cryptographic functionality

        For distributed TOEs, that implement a registration channel (as described in FCO_CPC_EXT.1.2), the ST author uses the selection “Ability to configure the cryptographic functionality” in this SFR, and its corresponding mapping in the TSS, to describe the configuration of any cryptographic aspects of the registration channel that can be modified by the operational environment in order to improve the channel security (reference the description of the content of Preparative Procedures in [SD, 3.4.1]).

        Ability to configure thresholds for SSH rekeying

        The selection "Ability to configure thresholds for SSH rekeying" may only be selected if SSH is selected within FTP_ITC.1, FTP_TRP.1 or FPT_ITT.1. This only applies if the TOE claims conformance to the Functional Package for SSH and the rekey threshold is configurable.

        Ability to configure the lifetime for IPsec SAs

        The selection “Ability to configure lifetime for IPsec SAs” must be included in the ST if the TOE supports secure communication via IPsec and the FCS_IPSEC_EXT.1 requirements are included in the ST. The configuration of the lifetime for IPsec SAs needs to be in line with the selection in FCS_IPSEC_EXT.1.7.

        Ability to configure the list of supported (D)TLS ciphers

        The selection "Ability to configure the list of supported (D)TLS ciphers" must be included in the ST if the TOE implements TLS or DTLS and the supported ciphersuites are configurable. This only applies if the TOE claims conformance to the Functional Package for TLS, and only if such a configuration option exists.

        Ability to configure the interaction between TOE components

        For distributed TOEs, the interaction between TOE components will be configurable (see FCO_CPC_EXT.1). Therefore, the ST author includes the selection "Ability to configure the interaction between TOE components" for distributed TOEs. A simple example would be the change of communication protocol according to FPT_ITT.1. Another example would be changing the management of a TOE component from direct remote administration to remote administration through another TOE component. A more complex use case would be if the realization of an SFR is achieved through two or more TOE components and the responsibilities between the two or more components could be modified.

        Ability to enable or disable automatic checking for updates or automatic updates

        Based on selections in FPT_TUD_EXT.1.2, FMT_MOF.1/AutoUpdate must be included if the option “Ability to enable or disable automatic checking for updates or automatic updates” is included in the ST.

        Ability to re-enable an Administrator account

        If the TOE offers the ability for a remote Administrator account to be disabled in line with FIA_AFL.1, then the ST author must select the option “Ability to re-enable an Administrator account” to allow the account to be re-enabled by a local Administrator.

        Ability to set the time which is used for time-stamps

        The selection “Ability to set the time which is used for time-stamps” should be included in the ST if the TOE allows the Administrator to set the time of the device which is then used in time stamps. This option should not be selected if the TOE does not allow manual time setting but only relies on synchronization with external time sources like NTP servers.

        Ability to configure NTP

        The selection “Ability to configure NTP” should be included in the ST if the TOE uses NTP for timestamp configuration. If selected, FCS_NTP_EXT.1 must be included in the ST as well.

        Ability to configure the reference identifier for the peer

        The selection “Ability to configure the reference identifier for the peer” should be included in the ST if the TOE allows the Administrator to specify the expected identity of a remote peer when establishing secure communications using a protocol included in the ST. For TOEs that support only IP address and FQDN identifier types, configuration of the reference identifier may be the same as configuration of the peer’s name for the purposes of connection.

        Ability to manage the TOE’s trust store and designate X509.v3 certificates as trust anchors

        The selection “Ability to manage the TOE’s trust store and designate X509.v3 certificates as trust anchors" should be included in the ST if the TOE supports management and configuration of the TOE’s trust store. This means the TOE supports X.509v3 certificates for some security functions. This only applies if the TOE claims conformance to the Functional Package for X.509.

        Ability to generate Certificate Signing Request (CSR) and process CA certificate response

        The selection "Ability to generate Certificate Signing Request (CSR) and process CA certificate response" must be included in the ST if the TOE implements Certificate Request or Enrollment Request processes. This only applies if the TOE claims conformance to the Functional Package for X.509, and only when FIA_X509_EXT.3 from the functional package is claimed.

        Ability to administer the TOE locally

        The TOE must provide functionality for remote administration. Local administration is optional. This cPP does not mandate a specific security management function to be available either through the local administration interface, the remote administration interface or both. Remote administrative sessions are specified in FTP_TRP.1/Admin.

        Ability to configure the local session inactivity time before session termination or locking

        The TOE must provide functionality to configure the access banner for FTA_TAB.1 and the session inactivity time(s) for FTA_SSL.3 and (if included) FTA_SSL_EXT.1, though an access banner is only required for each interactive (human-computer) interface (HCI), not for any programmatic interface [application programming interface (API), e.g., REST API].

        Ability to configure the authentication failure parameters for FIA_AFL.1

        This management function enables administrators to configure parameters related to authentication failure, such as the threshold for unsuccessful login attempts and the actions the TOE takes when that threshold is reached (e.g., account lockout, notification, or timed delays).

        Ability to manage the trusted public keys database

        If the TOE offers ability for a remote authorised IT entities or authorised remote Administrators to connect via an interface secured with SSH, then the ST author must select the option “Ability to manage the trusted public keys database” to account for management of public key authentication. It is acceptable for this management function to be implemented as part of general TOE management functionality or as a standalone management function.

        Ability to manage the public key or certificate used to validate the digital update

        If the TOE offers the ability to modify the public key used to validate the digital update, then the ST author must select the option “Ability to manage the public key or certificate used to validate the digital update”. There is no requirement to implement this as a standalone management function, it is acceptable for this management function to be implemented as part of the trusted update (FPT_TUD_EXT.1) functionality.

        No other capabilities

        If the TOE offers the ability for the Security Administrator to configure the audit behaviour, configure the services available prior to identification or authentication, or if any of the cryptographic functionality on the TOE can be configured, or if the ST is describing a distributed TOE, then the ST author makes the appropriate choice or choices in the second selection, otherwise select the option "No other capabilities" (in the latter case the selection may alternatively be left blank in the ST).

        Table 9: FMT_SMF.1.1 Management Function Guidance

        With respect to FAU_GEN.1.1, FMT_SMF.1 and FMT_MOF.1/Services the term ‘services’ refers to trusted path and trusted channel communications, on demand self-tests, trusted update and Administrator sessions (that exist under the trusted path) (e.g., netconf).

        195. The security management functions for FMT_SMF.1 are distributed throughout the cPP and are included as part of the requirements in FTA_SSL_EXT.1, FTA_SSL.3, FTA_TAB.1, FMT_MOF.1/ManualUpdate, FMT_MOF.1/AutoUpdate (if included in the ST), FIA_AFL.1, FPT_TUD_EXT.1.2 and FPT_TUD_EXT.2.2 (if included in the ST and if an administrator-configurable action is included as per Application Note 65 of FPT_TUD_EXT.2.4 in the cPP), FMT_MOF.1/Services, and FMT_MOF.1/Functions (for all of these SFRs that are included in the ST), FMT_MTD, FPT_TST_EXT, and any cryptographic management functions specified in the reference standards. If the TOE claims conformance to the Functional Package for X.509, any management functions defined there are relevant to this SFR as well. Compliance to these requirements satisfies compliance with FMT_SMF.1.

        196. The evaluator shall examine the TSS and Guidance Documentation and confirm that each management function specified in FMT_SMF.1 is adequately described. The evaluator shall confirm that the TSS details which security management functions are available through the local and/or remote administration interfaces.

        197. [Conditional] The evaluator shall examine the TSS and Guidance Documentation to verify they both describe the local administrative interface. The evaluator shall ensure the Guidance Documentation includes appropriate warnings for the administrator to ensure the interface is local.

        198. For distributed TOEs, with the option 'ability to configure the interaction between TOE components' the evaluator shall examine that the ways to configure the interaction between TOE components is detailed in the TSS and Guidance Documentation. The evaluator shall check that the TOE behaviour observed during testing of the configured SFRs is as described in the TSS and Guidance Documentation.

        The following content should be included if:

        199. (If 'configure local audit' is selected) The evaluator shall examine the TSS and Guidance Documentation to ensure that a description of the logging implementation is described in enough detail to determine how log files are maintained on the TOE.

        Guidance
        1. Guidance activities are covered in the TSS section.

        Tests

        201. The evaluator shall test management functions as part of testing the SFRs identified in the introduction to this section. No separate testing for FMT_SMF.1 is required unless one of the management functions in FMT_SMF.1.1 has not already been exercised under any other SFR.

        FMT_SMR.2 Restrictions on security roles

        The TSF shall maintain the roles:
        • Security Administrator.

        The TSF shall be able to associate users with roles.
        The TSF shall ensure that the conditions
        • The Security Administrator role shall be able to administer the TOE remotely

        are satisfied.
        Application Note:

        Application Note 28

        FMT_SMR.2.3 requires that a Security Administrator be able to administer the TOE through a remote mechanism. See Application Note 23 for the definition of remote administration.

        For distributed TOEs, not every TOE component is required to implement its own user management to fulfil this SFR. At least one component has to support authentication and identification of Security Administrators according to FIA_UIA_EXT.1. For the other TOE components authentication as Security Administrator can be realized through the use of a trusted channel (either according to FTP_ITC.1 or FPT_ITT.1) from a component that supports the authentication of Security Administrators according to FIA_UIA_EXT.1. The identification of users according to FIA_UIA_EXT.1.2 and the association of users with roles according to FMT_SMR.2.2 is done through the components that support the authentication of Security Administrators according to FIA_UIA_EXT.1.4. TOE components that authenticate Security Administrators through the use of a trusted channel are not required to support local administration of the component.

        A single user associated with the Security Administrator role does not necessarily have to be able to perform all security management functions defined in FMT_SMF.1 and does not necessarily have to able to perform local administration. All users associated with the Security Administrator role together need to be able to perform all security management functions defined in FMT_SMF.1 (mandatory and selected ones) and need to be able to perform remote administration.

        This implies that a user that can perform only a single security management function defined in FMT_SMF.1 needs to be regarded as Security Administrator of the TOE.

        202. The evaluator shall examine the TSS to determine that it details the TOE supported roles and any restrictions of the roles involving administration of the TOE (e.g., if local administrators and remote administrators have different privileges, or if several types of administrators with different privileges are supported by the TOE).

        Guidance

        203. The evaluator shall review the guidance documentation to ensure that it contains instructions for administering the TOE both locally and remotely, including any configuration that needs to be performed on the client for remote administration.

        Tests

        204. In the course of performing the testing activities for the evaluation, the evaluator shall use all supported interfaces, although it is not necessary to repeat each test involving an administrative action with each interface. The evaluator shall ensure, however, that each supported method of administering the TOE that conforms to the requirements of this cPP be tested.

        205. For example, if the following are possible:

        • direct connection if the TOE can be administered through a local hardware interface

        • SSH if the TSF shall be validated against the Functional Package for Secure Shell referenced in Section 2.2 of the cPP

        • TLS/HTTPS if the TSF has TLS implemented as defined in the Functional Package for TLS

        then all three methods of administration must be exercised during the evaluation team’s test activities.

        5.1.6 Protection of the TSF (FPT)

        FPT_SKP_EXT.1 Protection of TSF Data (for reading of all pre-shared, symmetric and private keys)

        The TSF shall prevent reading of all pre-shared keys, symmetric keys, and private keys.
        Application Note:

        The intent of this requirement is for the device to protect keys, key material, and authentication credentials from unauthorised disclosure. This data should only be accessed for the purposes of their assigned security functionality, and there is no need for them to be displayed/accessed at any other time. This requirement does not prevent the device from providing indication that these exist, are in use, or are still valid. It does, however, restrict the reading of the values outright.

        206. The evaluator shall examine the TSS to determine that it details how any preshared keys, symmetric keys, and private keys are stored and that they are unable to be viewed through any interface designed specifically for that purpose, by any enabled role, as outlined in the application note. If these values are not stored in plaintext, the TSS shall describe how they are protected/obscured.

        Guidance

        207. None

        Tests

        208. None

        FPT_STM_EXT.1 Reliable Time Stamps

        The TSF shall be able to provide reliable time stamps for its own use.
        The TSF shall [selection: allow the Security Administrator to set the time, synchronise time with an NTP server, obtain time from the underlying virtualization system].
        Application Note:

        Reliable time stamps are expected to be used with other TSF, e.g., for the generation of audit data that enables the Security Administrator to investigate incidents by checking the order of events and determining the actual local time when events occurred. The required level of accuracy is determined by the Administrator.

        The TOE depends on time and date information that may be provided by a local real-time clock managed by the Security Administrator, obtained from one or more NTP servers, or received from the underlying virtualization system. The corresponding option(s) are selected in FPT_STM_EXT.1.2. Automatic synchronization with an NTP server is recommended but not required. When the TOE communicates with an NTP server, the inclusion of FCS_NTP_EXT.1 in the ST is expected. The ST author describes in the TSS how the TOE receives external time and date information and how this information is maintained. For a Case 1 vND, the virtualization system can act as an external time source. For a Case 2 vND, the virtualization system is part of the TOE, so the time is typically set by a Security Administrator or synchronized with an NTP server.

        The term “reliable time stamps” refers to the strict use of the provided time and date information and to the logging of all discontinuous changes to the time settings, including information about the old and new time values. With this information, the real time for all audit data can be determined. All discontinuous time changes, whether initiated by an Administrator or an automated process, are expected to be audited. No audit is needed when time is changed through kernel or system facilities—such as daytime (3)—that do not introduce discontinuities.

        For distributed TOEs, the Security Administrator is expected to maintain synchronization between the time settings of different TOE components. All components should either remain synchronized (for example, by internal synchronization or by using a common NTP source) or have a known and documented offset for each component pair, including those synchronized to different time zones.

        209. The evaluator shall examine the TSS to ensure that it lists each security function that makes use of time, and that it provides a description of how the time is maintained and considered reliable in the context of each of the time related functions.

        The following content should be included if:

        210. If 'obtain time from the underlying virtualization system' is selected, the evaluator shall examine the TSS to ensure that it identifies the Virtualization System (VS) interface the TOE uses to obtain time. If there is a delay between updates to the time on the VS and updating the time on the TOE, the TSS shall identify the maximum possible delay.

        Guidance

        211. The evaluator shall examine the guidance documentation to ensure it instructs the administrator how to set the time. If the TOE supports the use of an NTP server, the guidance documentation instructs how a communication path is established between the TOE and the NTP server, and any configuration of the NTP client on the TOE to support this communication.

        The following content should be included if:

        212. If the TOE supports obtaining time from the underlying VS, then the evaluator shall verify that the Guidance Documentation specifies any configuration steps necessary. If no configuration is necessary, then no statement is necessary in the Guidance Documentation. If there is a delay between updates to the time on the VS and updating the time on the TOE, then the evaluator shall ensure the Guidance Documentation informs the administrator of the maximum possible delay.

        Tests

        213. The evaluator shall perform the following tests:



          The following content should be included if:

          Test 1: If the TOE supports direct setting of the time by the Security Administrator, then the evaluator shall use the guidance documentation to set the time. The evaluator shall then use an available interface to observe that the time was set correctly.

          The following content should be included if:

          Test 2: If the TOE supports the use of an NTP server, then the evaluator shall use the guidance documentation to configure the NTP client on the TOE and set up a communication path with the NTP server. The evaluator shall observe that the NTP server has set the time to what is expected. If the TOE supports multiple protocols for establishing a connection with the NTP server, then the evaluator shall perform this test using each supported protocol claimed in the guidance documentation.

          The following content should be included if:

          Test 3 [conditional]: If the TOE obtains time from the underlying VS, then the evaluator shall record the time on the TOE, modify the time on the underlying VS, and verify the modified time is reflected by the TOE. If there is a delay between setting the time on the VS and when the time is reflected on the TOE, then the evaluator shall ensure this delay is consistent with the TSS and Guidance.

        214. If the audit component of the TOE consists of several parts with independent time information, then the evaluator shall verify that the time information between the different parts are either synchronized or that it is possible for all audit information to relate the time information of the different part to one base information unambiguously.

        FPT_TST_EXT.1 TSF Testing

        The TSF shall run a suite of the following self-tests:
        • During initial start-up (on power on) to verify the integrity of the TOE firmware and software;

        • Prior to providing any cryptographic service and

        [selection: at no other time, on-demand, continuously, [assignment: conditions under which self-tests should occur]] to verify correct operation of cryptographic implementation necessary to fulfil the TSF;
        • [selection: no other, start-up, on-demand, continuous, at the conditions [assignment: conditions under which self-tests should occur]]
        self-tests [assignment: 'list an identifier for each self-test that is additional to those identified in the first two bullet points'].to demonstrate the correct operation of the TSF.
        Application Note:

        Application Note 31

        For the third bullet point, the following restriction applies: If, and only if 'no other' is selected in the selection, 'none' may be used in the second assignment.

        Non-distributed TOEs may internally consist of several components that contribute to enforcing SFRs. Self-testing should cover all components that contribute to enforcing SFRs and verification of integrity should cover all software that contributes to enforcing SFRs on all components.

        For distributed TOEs, all TOE components have to perform self-tests. This does not necessarily mean that each TOE component has to carry out the same self-tests.

        The TSF shall respond to [selection: all failures, [assignment: list of failures detected by self-tests]] by [selection: entering a maintenance mode, rebooting, [assignment: other methods to enter a secure state]].
        Application Note:

        Application Note 32

        For failed self-tests related to enforcing SFRs as defined in FPT_TST_EXT.1.1, the reaction of the TOE to each failure is described in the ST. FPT_TST_EXT.1.2 supports two modeling approaches. In the first, the TOE reacts in the same way to all self-test failures that enforce SFRs by selecting “all failures” in the first selection and identifying the corresponding reaction in the second selection. In the second approach, the TOE may define different reactions for specific self-test failures by listing the failures in the first selection and the associated reactions in the second. In this latter case, the ST should clearly identify which self-test failure corresponds to each defined TOE behaviour.

        215. The evaluator shall examine the TSS to ensure that it details each of the selftests that are identified by the SFR; this description should include an outline of what the tests are actually doing (e.g., rather than saying "memory is tested", a description similar to "memory is tested by writing a value to each memory location and reading it back to ensure it is identical to what was written" shall be used). The evaluator shall ensure that the TSS makes an argument that the tests are sufficient to demonstrate that the TSF is operating correctly. If more than one failure response is listed in FPT_TST_EXT.1.2, then the evaluator shall examine the TSS to ensure it clarifies which response is associated with which type of failure.

        216. For distributed TOEs, the evaluator shall examine the TSS to ensure that it details which TOE component performs which self-tests and when these selftests are run. The evaluator shall also examine the TSS to ensure it describes how the TOE reacts if one or more TOE components fail self-testing (e.g., halting and displaying an error message; failover behaviour).

        Guidance

        217. The evaluator shall also ensure that the guidance documentation describes the possible errors that may result from such tests, and actions the administrator should take in response; these possible errors shall correspond to those described in the TSS.

        218. For distributed TOEs, the evaluator shall ensure that the guidance documentation describes how to determine from an error message returned which TOE component has failed the self-test.

        Tests

        219. It is expected that at least the following tests are performed:




        • Test FPT_TST_EXT.1:1:

          Verification of the integrity of the firmware and executable software of the TOE.

        • Test FPT_TST_EXT.1:2:

          Verification of the correct operation of the cryptographic functions necessary to fulfil any of the SFRs.

        • Test FPT_TST_EXT.1:3:

          220. Although formal compliance is not mandated, the self-tests performed should aim for a level of confidence comparable to:

          a. [FIPS 140-2], Section 4.9.1, Software/firmware integrity test for the verification of the integrity of the firmware and executable software. Note that the testing is not restricted to the cryptographic functions of the TOE.

          b. [FIPS 140-2], Section 4.9.1, Cryptographic algorithm test for the verification of the correct operation of cryptographic functions. Alternatively, national requirements of any CCRA member state for the security evaluation of cryptographic functions should be considered as appropriate.

          c. [FIPS 140-3] ([ISO/IEC 19790:2015]), Section 7.10.2.2, Software/firmware integrity test for the verification of the integrity of the firmware and executable software. Note that the testing is not restricted to the cryptographic functions of the TOE.

          d. [ISO/IEC 19790:2025], Section 7.10.3.2, Pre-operational software/firmware integrity test. Verification using an approved integrity technique. Note that the testing is not restricted to the cryptographic functions of the TOE.

          221. The evaluator shall verify that the self-tests described above are carried out according to the SFR and in agreement with the descriptions in the TSS.

        • The following content should be included if:
          • the TOE implements "Distributed TOE"

          222. For distributed TOEs, the evaluator shall perform testing of self-tests on all TOE components according to the description in the TSS about which self-tests are performed by which component.

        FPT_TUD_EXT.1 Trusted Update

        The TSF shall provide Security Administrators the ability to query the currently executing version of the TOE firmware/software and

        [selection: the most recently installed version of the TOE firmware/software, no other TOE firmware/software version].
        Application Note:

        Application Note 33

        If a trusted update can be installed on the TOE with a delayed activation the version of both the currently executing image and the installed but inactive image must be provided. In this case the option “the most recently installed version of the TOE firmware/software” must be chosen from the selection in FPT_TUD_EXT.1.1. If all trusted updates become active as part of the installation process, only the currently executing version needs to be provided. In this case the option “no other TOE firmware/software version” should be chosen from the selection in FPT_TUD_EXT.1.1.

        For a distributed TOE, the method of determining the installed versions on each component of the TOE is described in the operational guidance.

        The TSF shall provide Security Administrators the ability to manually initiate updates to TOE firmware/software and

        [selection: support automatic checking for updates, support automatic updates, no other update mechanism].
        Application Note:

        Application Note 34

        The selection in FPT_TUD_EXT.1.2 distinguishes the support of automatic checking for updates and support of automatic updates. The first option refers to a TOE that checks whether a new update is available, communicates this to the Administrator (e.g., through a message during an administrative session, through log files) but requires some action by the Administrator to actually perform the update. The second option refers to a TOE that checks for updates and automatically installs them upon availability. If the TOE checks and automatically installs the update, then FMT_MOF.1/AutoUpdate should be included.

        The TSF shall provide means to authenticate firmware/software updates to the TOE using a

        [selection: X.509 certificate, digital signature] prior to installing those udpates.
        Application Note:

        Application Note 35

        The ST author selects “X.509 certificate” when the TOE uses X.509 certificates in a manner compliant with the certificate validation requirements in the Functional Package for X.509. The digital signature algorithm must be one of the algorithms specified in FCS_COP.1/SigVer.

        The ST author selects ‘digital signature’ for all other digital mechanisms (e.g., X.509 certificates that do not meet the certificate validation requirements in the Functional Package for X.509, GPG, raw public key). The digital algorithm must be one of the algorithms specified in FCS_COP.1/SigVer.

        The TOE itself must perform the verification of the update signature, regardless of whether the update is authenticated using an X.509 certificate or another digital signature mechanism.

        For distributed TOEs, all TOE components must support Trusted Update. The verification of the signature on the update should be done by each TOE component itself (signature verification).

        Updating a distributed TOE might lead to the situation where different TOE components are running different software versions. Depending on the differences between the different software versions the impact of a mixture of different software versions might be no problem at all or critical to the proper functioning of the TOE. The TSS must detail the mechanisms that support the continuous proper functioning of the TOE during trusted update of distributed TOEs.

        If “X.509 certificate” is selected, certificates are validated in accordance with the Functional Package for X.509. Additionally, FPT_TUD_EXT.2 must be included in the ST.

        ‘Update’ in the context of this SFR refers to the process of replacing a non-volatile (NV), system resident software component with another. The former is referred to as the NV image, and the latter is the update image. While the update image is typically newer than the NV image, this is not a requirement. There are legitimate cases where the system owner may want to rollback a component to an older version (e.g., when the component manufacturer releases a faulty update, or when the system relies on an undocumented feature no longer present in the update). Likewise, the owner may want to update with the same version as the NV image to recover from faulty storage.

        All discrete firmware and software elements (e.g., applications, drivers, and kernel) of the TSF need to be protected, (i.e., they should be digitally signed by the corresponding manufacturer and subsequently verified by the mechanism performing the update).

        223. The evaluator shall verify that the TSS describes how to query the currently active version. If a trusted update can be installed on the TOE with a delayed activation, the TSS shall describe how and when the inactive version becomes active. The evaluator shall verify this description.

        224. The evaluator shall verify that the TSS describes all TSF software update mechanisms for updating the system firmware and software (for simplicity the term 'software' will be used in the following although the requirements apply to firmware and software). The evaluator shall verify that the description includes the method used to authenticate the update, including either digital-signature verification or X.509 certificate-based verification when selected in FPT_TUD_EXT.1. The evaluator shall verify that the TSS describes how candidate updates are obtained, the processing performed to authenticate the update, and the actions taken for both successful and unsuccessful authentication.

        The following content should be included if:

        225. If the options ‘support automatic checking for updates’ or ‘support automatic updates’ are chosen from the selections in FPT_TUD_EXT.1.2, the evaluator shall verify that the TSS explains what actions are involved in automatic checking or automatic updating by the TOE, respectively.

        226. For distributed TOEs, the evaluator shall examine the TSS to ensure that it describes how all TOE components are updated, that it describes all mechanisms that support continuous proper functioning of the TOE during update (when applying updates separately to individual TOE components) and how verification of the signature is performed for each TOE component.

        Guidance

        227. The evaluator shall verify that the guidance documentation describes how to query the currently active version. If a trusted update can be installed on the TOE with a delayed activation, the guidance documentation shall describe how to query the loaded but inactive version.

        228. The evaluator shall verify that the guidance documentation describes how the verification of the authenticity of the update is performed (digital signature verification). The description shall include the procedures for successful and unsuccessful verification. The description shall correspond to the description in the TSS.

        229. For distributed TOEs, the evaluator shall verify that the guidance documentation describes how the versions of individual TOE components are determined for FPT_TUD_EXT.1, how all TOE components are updated, and the error conditions that may arise from checking or applying the update (e.g., failure of signature verification, or exceeding available storage space) along with appropriate recovery actions. The guidance documentation only has to describe the procedures relevant for the Security Administrator; it does not need to give information about the internal communication (amongst TOE components) that takes place when applying updates.

        230. For distributed TOEs, the evaluator shall examine the Guidance Documentation to ensure that it describes how all TOE components are updated, that it describes all mechanisms that support continuous proper functioning of the TOE during update (when applying updates separately to individual TOE components) and how verification of the signature is performed for each TOE component.

        The following content should be included if:

        231. If the ST author indicates that a certificate-based mechanism is used for software update digital signature verification, the evaluator shall verify that the Guidance Documentation contains a description of how the certificates are contained on the device. The evaluator shall also ensure that the Guidance Documentation describes how the certificates are installed/updated/selected, if necessary.

        Tests

        232. The evaluator shall perform the following tests:




        • Test FPT_TUD_EXT.1:1:

          Test 1: The evaluator shall perform the version verification activity to determine the current version of the product. If a trusted update can be installed on the TOE with a delayed activation, the evaluator shall also query the most recently installed version (for this test the TOE shall be in a state where these two versions match). The evaluator will obtain a legitimate update using procedures described in the guidance documentation and verify that it has been successfully installed on the TOE. For some TOEs loading the update onto the TOE and activation of the update are separate steps (‘activation’ could be performed e.g., by a distinct activation step or by rebooting the device). In that case, the evaluator shall verify after loading the update onto the TOE but before activation of the update that the current version of the product did not change but the most recently installed version has changed to the new product version. After the update, the evaluator shall perform the version verification activity again to verify the version correctly corresponds to that of the update and that current version of the product and most recently installed version match again.

        • Test FPT_TUD_EXT.1:2:

          Test 2: If the TOE itself verifies a digital signature in order to authorise the installation of an image to update the TOE, the following test shall be performed (otherwise the test shall be omitted). The evaluator shall first confirm that no updates are pending and then perform the version verification activity to determine the current version of the product, verifying that it is different from the version claimed in the update(s) to be used in this test. The evaluator shall obtain or produce illegitimate updates as defined below and attempt to install them on the TOE. The evaluator shall verify that the TOE rejects all of the illegitimate updates. The evaluator shall perform this test using all of the following forms of illegitimate updates:

          i. A modified version (e.g., using a hex editor) of a legitimately signed update

          ii. An image that has not been signed

          iii. An otherwise valid image with a properly formed signature that was signed by an unknown key. The purpose of this test is to verify the TOE would only accept images signed by an explicitly trusted key (or a key associated with a trusted certificate).

          iv. The handling of version information of the most recently installed version might differ between different TOEs depending on the point in time when an attempted update is rejected. The evaluator shall verify that the TOE handles the most recently installed version information for that case as described in the guidance documentation. After the TOE has rejected the update, the evaluator shall verify that both the current version and most recently installed version reflect the same version information as prior to the update attempt.

        • Test FPT_TUD_EXT.1:3:

          233. The evaluator shall perform Test 1 and Test 2 for all supported methods (manual updates, automatic checking for updates, automatic updates).

        • The following content should be included if:
          • the TOE implements "Distributed TOE"

          234. For distributed TOEs, the evaluator shall perform Test 1 and Test 2 for all TOE components.

        5.1.7 TOE Access (FTA)

        FTA_SSL.3 TSF-initiated Termination (Refinement)

        The TSF shall terminate a remote interactive session after a Security Administrator-configurable time interval of session inactivity.

        Application Note:

        Application Note 36

        An interactive session governed by this SFR is a session in which an authenticated state is achieved and then preserved across multiple commands. By contrast, if authentication accompanies each individual command (without preservation of the same authenticated state) then this is not considered an interactive session.

        235. The evaluator shall examine the TSS to determine that it details the administrative remote session termination and the related inactivity time period.

        Guidance

        236. The evaluator shall confirm that the guidance documentation includes instructions for configuring the inactivity time period for remote administrative session termination.

        Tests

        237. For each method of remote administration, the evaluator shall perform the following test:

        • Test FTA_SSL.3:1:

          Test 1: The evaluator shall follow the guidance documentation to configure several different values for the inactivity time period referenced in the component. For each period configured, the evaluator shall establish a remote interactive session with the TOE. The evaluator shall then observe that the session is terminated after the configured time period.

        FTA_SSL.4 User-initiated Termination (Refinement)

        The TSF shall allow Administrator-initiated termination of the Administrator’s own interactive session.

        238. The evaluator shall examine the TSS to determine that it details how the remote administrative session (and if applicable the local administrative session) are terminated.

        Guidance

        239. The evaluator shall confirm that the guidance documentation states how to terminate a remote interactive session (and if applicable the local administrative session).

        Tests

        240. The evaluator shall perform the following tests:


          The following content should be included if:
          • the TOE implements "Local security admin"

          Test 1 [conditional]: If the TOE supports local administration, the evaluator shall initiate an interactive local session with the TOE. The evaluator shall then follow the guidance documentation to exit or log off the session and observe that the session has been terminated.

          The following content should be included if:
          • the TOE implements "Password-based remote administration"

          Test 2: For each method of remote administration, the evaluator shall initiate an interactive remote session with the TOE. The evaluator shall then follow the guidance documentation to exit or log off the session and observe that the session has been terminated.

        FTA_TAB.1 Default TOE Access Banners (Refinement)

        Before establishing an Administrative user session the TSF shall display a Security Administrator-specified advisory notice and consent warning regarding use of the TOE message.

        Application Note:

        Application Note 37

        This requirement is intended to apply to interactive sessions between a human administrator and a TOE. IT entities establishing connections or programmatic connections (e.g., remote procedure calls over a network) are not required to be covered by this requirement.

        241. The evaluator shall check the TSS to ensure that it details each administrative method of access (local and/or remote) available to the Security Administrator (e.g., serial port, SSH, HTTPS). The evaluator shall check the TSS to ensure that all administrative methods of access available to the Security Administrator are listed and that the TSS states that the TOE is displaying an advisory notice and a consent warning message for each administrative method of access. The advisory notice and the consent warning message may be different for different administrative methods of access and may be configured during initial configuration (e.g., via a configuration file).

        Guidance

        242. The evaluator shall check the guidance documentation to ensure that it describes how to configure the banner message.

        Tests

        243. The evaluator shall also perform the following test:

        • Test FTA_TAB.1:1:

          Test 1: The evaluator shall follow the guidance documentation to configure a notice and consent warning message. The evaluator shall then, for each method of human interactive access specified in the TSS, establish a session with the TOE. The evaluator shall verify that the notice and consent warning message is displayed in each instance.

        5.1.8 Trusted Channel (FTP_ITC)

        FTP_ITC.1 Inter-TSF Trusted Channel (Refinement)

        The TSF shall be capable of using

        [selection: IPsec, SSH as defined in the Functional Package for SSH, TLS as defined in the Functional Package for TLS, DTLS as defined in the Functional Package for TLS, HTTPS]

        to provide a trusted communication channel between itself and another trusted IT product authorised IT entities supporting the following capabilities: audit server,

        [selection: authentication server, [assignment: other capabilities], no other capabilities]

        that is logically distinct from other communication channels and provides assured identification of its end points and protection of the channel data from modification or disclosure and detection of modification of the channel data.

        The TSF shall permit [selection: the TSF, another trusted IT product, the authorised IT entities] to initiate communication via the trusted channel.
        The TSF shall initiate communication via the trusted channel for [assignment: list of services for which the TSF is able to initiate communications].
        Application Note:

        Application Note 38

        The intent of the above requirement is to provide a means by which a cryptographic protocol may be used to protect external communications with authorised IT entities that the TOE interacts with to perform its functions. The TOE uses at least one of the listed protocols for communications with the server that collects the audit information. If it communicates with an authentication server (e.g., RADIUS), then the ST author chooses “authentication server” in FTP_ITC.1.1 and this connection must be capable of being protected by one of the listed protocols. If other authorised IT entities are protected, the ST author makes the appropriate assignments (for those entities) and selections (for the protocols that are used to protect those connections). The ST author selects the mechanism or mechanisms supported by the TOE, and then ensures that the detailed protocol requirements in Annex B corresponding to their selection are included in the ST.

        While there are no requirements on the party initiating the communication, the ST author lists in the assignment for FTP_ITC.1.3 the services for which the TOE can initiate the communication with the authorised IT entity.

        The requirement implies that not only are communications protected when they are initially established, but also on resumption after an outage. It may be the case that some part of the TOE setup involves manually setting up tunnels to protect other communication, and if after an outage the TOE attempts to re-establish the communication automatically with (the necessary) manual intervention, there may be a window created where an attacker might be able to gain critical information or compromise a connection.

        Where X.509 certificates are used to authenticate remote endpoints in support of an FTP_ITC.1 channel, relevant SFR claims from the Functional Package for X.509 must be used. This requires support for attributes such as certificate revocation status and intermediate CAs.

        If the TOE claims FCS_TLSS_EXT.2 (TLS Server Support for Mutual Authentication) from the Functional Package for TLS and the TOE passes presented identifiers of clients used for client authentication to a directory server for comparison, then the connection to the directory server used to verify presented identifiers of TLS clients needs to be protected by a trusted channel (i.e., FTP_ITC.1). If a trusted channel is used for the integrity protection for communication between the TOE and a directory server, then the directory server must be added to the assignment for other capabilities in FTP_ITC.1. Note: The directory server is only expected to handle the comparison of the presented identifier but not to perform full X.509 certificate validation on behalf of the TOE.

        See Section B.4.1 for additional requirements.

        If "TLS" or "DTLS" is selected, then the TSF is validated against the applicable requirements of the Functional Package for TLS.

        If "SSH" is selected, then the TSF is validated against the applicable requirements of the Functional Package for SSH.

        244. The evaluator shall examine the TSS to determine that, for all communications with authorised IT entities identified in the requirement, each secure communication mechanism is identified in terms of the allowed protocols for that IT entity, whether the TOE acts as a server or a client, and the method of assured identification of the non-TSF endpoint. The evaluator shall also confirm that all secure communication mechanisms are described in sufficient detail to allow the evaluator to match them to the cryptographic protocol SFRs listed in the ST.

        Guidance

        245. The evaluator shall confirm that the guidance documentation contains instructions for establishing the allowed protocols with each authorised IT entity, and that it contains recovery instructions should a connection be unintentionally broken.

        Tests

        246. The developer shall provide to the evaluator application layer configuration settings for all secure communication mechanisms specified by the FTP_ITC.1 requirement. This information should be sufficiently detailed to allow the evaluator to determine the application layer timeout settings for each cryptographic protocol. There is no expectation that this information must be recorded in any public-facing document or report.

        247. The evaluator shall perform the following tests:




        • Test FTP_ITC.1:1:

          Test 1: The evaluator shall ensure that communications using each protocol with each authorised IT entity is tested during the course of the evaluation, setting up each connection as described in the guidance documentation and ensuring that communication is successful.

        • Test FTP_ITC.1:2:

          Test 2: For each protocol that the TOE can initiate as defined in the requirement, the evaluator shall follow the guidance documentation to ensure that the communication channel can in fact be initiated from the TOE.

        • Test FTP_ITC.1:3:

          Test 3: The evaluator shall verify that, for each communication channel with an authorised IT entity, the channel data is not sent in plaintext.

        • Test FTP_ITC.1:4:

          Test 4: Objective: The objective of this test is to ensure that the TOE reacts appropriately to any connection outage or interruption of the route to the external IT entities.

          The evaluator shall, for each instance where the TOE acts as a client using a secure communication mechanism with a distinct IT entity, interrupt the connection of that IT entity for: i) a duration that exceeds the TOE’s application layer timeout setting, ii) a duration shorter than the application layer timeout but of sufficient length to interrupt the network link layer.

          The evaluator shall ensure that, when the connectivity is restored, communications are appropriately protected and no TSF data is sent in plaintext.

          In the case where the TOE is able to detect TOE external interruption (such as a cable being physically removed or a virtual connection being disabled), another network device shall be used to interrupt the connection between the TOE and the distinct IT entity. The interruption shall be external to the TOE (i.e., by manipulating the test environment and not by TOE configuration change).

        248. Further assurance activities are associated with the specific protocols.

        249. For distributed TOEs, the evaluator shall perform tests on all TOE components according to the mapping of external secure channels to TOE components in the Security Target.

        250. The developer shall provide to the evaluator application layer configuration settings for all secure communication mechanisms specified by the FTP_ITC.1 requirement. This information should be sufficiently detailed to allow the evaluator to determine the application layer timeout settings for each cryptographic protocol. There is no expectation that this information must be recorded in any public- facing document or report.

        FTP_TRP.1/Admin Trusted Path (Refinement)

        The TSF shall be capable of using

        [selection: IPsec, SSH as defined in the Functional Package for SSH, TLS as defined in the Functional Package for TLS, DTLS as defined in the Functional Package for TSL, HTTPS]

        to provide a communication path between itself and authorised remote Administrators users that is logically distinct from other communication paths and provides assured identification of its endpoints and protection of the communicated data from disclosure and provides detection of modification of the channel data.

        The TSF shall permit remote Administrators users to initiate communication via the trusted path.

        The TSF shall require the use of the trusted path for initial Administrator authentication and all remote administration actions.

        Application Note:

        Application Note 39

        This requirement ensures that authorised remote Administrators initiate all communication with the TOE via a human-interactive trusted path, and that all communication with the TOE by remote Administrators is performed over this path. The data passed in this trusted communication channel is encrypted as defined by the protocol chosen in the first selection. The ST author selects the mechanism or mechanisms supported by the TOE, and then ensures that the detailed protocol requirements in Annex B corresponding to their selection, or the protocol requirements of the packages specified in Section 2.1 are included in the ST. Where X.509 certificates are used to authenticate authorised Administrators, FIA_X509_EXT.1 in the Functional Package for X.509 is to be used (which requires checking certificate revocation, implementing a trust store, and supporting a certificate chain).

        See Section B.4.1 for additional requirements.

        If "TLS" or "DTLS" is selected, then the TSF is validated against the applicable requirements of the Functional Package for TLS.

        If "SSH" is selected, then the TSF is evaluated against the applicable requirements of the Functional Package for SSH.

        251. The evaluator shall examine the TSS to determine that the remote TOE administration methods are indicated, along with how those communications are protected. The evaluator shall also confirm that all protocols listed in the TSS in support of TOE administration are consistent with those specified in the requirement, and are included in the requirements in the ST.

        Guidance

        252. The evaluator shall confirm that the guidance documentation contains instructions for establishing the remote administrative sessions for each supported method.

        Tests

        253. The evaluator shall perform the following tests:


        • Test FTP_TRP.1/Admin:1:

          Test 1: The evaluators shall ensure that communications using each specified (in the guidance documentation) remote administration method are tested during the course of the evaluation, setting up the connections as described in the guidance documentation and verifying that communication is successful.

        • Test FTP_TRP.1/Admin:2:

          Test 2: The evaluator shall verify, for each communication channel, the channel data is not sent in plaintext.

        254. Further assurance activities are associated with the specific protocols.

        255. For distributed TOEs, the evaluator shall perform tests on all TOE components according to the mapping of trusted paths to TOE components in the Security Target.

        5.1.9 TOE Security Functional Requirements Rationale

        The following rationale provides justification for each SFR for the TOE, showing that the SFRs are suitable to address the specified threats:

        Table 9: SFR Rationale
        ThreatAddressed byRationale
        T.SECURITY_​FUNCTIONALITY_​COMPROMISEFCS_CKM.6
        FIA_PMG_EXT.1 (Implementation-based)
        FIA_UAU.7 (Implementation-based)
        FMT_MTD.1/CryptoKeys (Implementation-based)
        FMT_SMF.1
        FPT_APW_EXT.1 (Implementation-based)
        FPT_SKP_EXT.1
        T.SECURITY_​FUNCTIONALITY_​FAILUREFPT_TST_EXT.1
        T.UNAUTHORISED_​ADMINISTRATOR_​ACCESSFIA_AFL.1 (Implementation-based)If the TOE provides remote administration using a password-based authentication mechanism, FIA_AFL.1 provides actions on reaching a threshold number of consecutive password failures
        FIA_UIA_EXT.1
        FMT_MOF.1/Functions (Selection-based)optional additional administration capabilities are offered in FMT_MOF.1/Functions
        FMT_MOF.1/Services (Selection-based)optional additional administration capabilities are offered in FMT_MOF.1/Servicesoptional additional administration capabilities in FMT_MOF.1/Services and FMT_MOF.1/Functions
        FMT_MTD.1/CoreDataThe relevant administration capabilities are defined in FMT_MTD.1/CoreData
        FMT_SMF.1The relevant administration capabilities are defined in FMT_SMF.1 The relevant administration capabilities are defined in FMT_SMF.1 The relevant administration capabilities are defined in FMT_SMF.1
        FMT_SMR.2The Administrator role is defined in FMT_SMR.2
        FTA_SSL_EXT.1 (Implementation-based)
        FTA_SSL.3
        FTA_SSL.4
        FTA_TAB.1
        FTP_TRP.1/AdminThe secure channel used for remote Administrator connections is specified in FTP_TRP.1/AdminThe secure channel used for remote Administrator connections is specified in FTP_TRP.1/Admin
        T.UNDETECTED_​ACTIVITYFAU_GEN.1
        FAU_GEN.2
        FAU_SAR.1 (Selection-based)
        FAU_STG_EXT.1
        FAU_STG_EXT.4 (Selection-based)
        FAU_STG.2 (Optional)
        FCS_NTP_EXT.1 (Selection-based)
        FMT_MOF.1/Functions (Selection-based)
        FMT_SMF.1
        FPT_STM_EXT.1
        T.UNTRUSTED_​COMMUNICATIONS_​CHANNELSFCS_IPSEC_EXT.1 (Selection-based)
        FPT_ITT.1 (Optional)
        FTP_ITC.1
        FTP_TRP.1/Admin
        T.UPDATE_​COMPROMISEFMT_MOF.1/AutoUpdate (Selection-based)
        FMT_MOF.1/ManualUpdate
        FMT_SMF.1
        FPT_TUD_EXT.1
        FPT_TUD_EXT.2 (Selection-based)
        T.WEAK_​AUTHENTICATION_​ENDPOINTSFCO_CPC_EXT.1 (Optional)
        FPT_ITT.1 (Optional)
        FTP_ITC.1
        FTP_TRP.1/Admin
        FTP_TRP.1/Join (Optional)
        T.WEAK_​CRYPTOGRAPHYFCS_CKM_EXT.7
        FCS_CKM.1/AKG
        FCS_COP.1/CMAC (Selection-based)
        FCS_COP.1/DataEncryption
        FCS_COP.1/Hash
        FCS_COP.1/KeyedHash
        FCS_COP.1/SigGen
        FCS_COP.1/SigVer
        FCS_RBG.1
        FMT_SMF.1

        5.2 Security Assurance Requirements

        5.2.1 Class ADV: Development

        The information about the TOE is contained in the guidance documentation available to the end user as well as the TSS portion of the ST. The TOE developer must concur with the description of the product that is contained in the TSS as it relates to the functional requirements. The evaluation activities contained in Section 5.1 Security Functional Requirements should provide the ST authors with sufficient information to determine the appropriate content for the TSS section.

        ADV_FSP.1 Basic Functional Specification (ADV_FSP.1)

        The functional specification describes the TSFIs. It is not necessary to have a formal or complete specification of these interfaces. Additionally, because TOEs conforming to this PP will necessarily have interfaces to the Operational Environment that are not directly invocable by TOE users, there is little point specifying that such interfaces be described in and of themselves since only indirect testing of such interfaces may be possible. For this PP, the activities for this family should focus on understanding the interfaces presented in the TSS in response to the functional requirements and the interfaces presented in the AGD documentation. No additional “functional specification” documentation is necessary to satisfy the evaluation activities specified. The interfaces that need to be evaluated are characterized through the information needed to perform the assurance activities listed, rather than as an independent, abstract list.

        Developer action elements:

        The developer shall provide a functional specification.
        The developer shall provide a tracing from the functional specification to the SFRs.

        Content and presentation elements:

        The functional specification shall describe the purpose and method of use for each SFR-enforcing and SFR-supporting TSFI.
        The functional specification shall identify all parameters associated with each SFR-enforcing and SFR-supporting TSFI.
        The functional specification shall provide rationale for the implicit categorization of interfaces as SFR-non-interfering.
        The tracing shall demonstrate that the SFRs trace to TSFIs in the functional specification.

        Evaluator action elements:

        The evaluator shall confirm that the information provided meets all requirements for content and presentation of evidence.
        The evaluator shall determine that the functional specification is an accurate and complete instantiation of the SFRs.
        There are no specific assurance activities associated with these SARs, except ensuring the information is provided. The functional specification documentation is provided to support the evaluation activities described in Section 5.1 Security Functional Requirements, and other activities described for AGD, ATE, and AVA SARs. The requirements on the content of the functional specification information is implicitly assessed by virtue of the other assurance activities being performed; if the evaluator is unable to perform an activity because there is insufficient interface information, then an adequate functional specification has not been provided.

        5.2.2 Class AGD: Guidance Documents

        The guidance documents will be provided with the ST. Guidance must include a description of how the IT personnel verifies that the Operational Environment can fulfill its role for the security functionality. The documentation should be in an informal style and readable by the IT personnel. Guidance must be provided for every operational environment that the product supports as claimed in the ST. This guidance includes instructions to successfully install the TSF in that environment; and Instructions to manage the security of the TSF as a product and as a component of the larger operational environment. Guidance pertaining to particular security functionality is also provided; requirements on such guidance are contained in the evaluation activities specified with each requirement.

        AGD_OPE.1 Operational User Guidance (AGD_OPE.1)

        Developer action elements:

        The developer shall provide operational user guidance.
        Application Note: The operational user guidance does not have to be contained in a single document. Guidance to users, administrators and application developers can be spread among documents or web pages. Rather than repeat information here, the developer should review the assurance activities for this component to ascertain the specifics of the guidance that the evaluator will be checking for. This will provide the necessary information for the preparation of acceptable guidance.

        Content and presentation elements:

        The operational user guidance shall describe, for each user role, the user-accessible functions and privileges that should be controlled in a secure processing environment, including appropriate warnings.
        Application Note: User and administrator are to be considered in the definition of user role.
        The operational user guidance shall describe, for each user role, how to use the available interfaces provided by the TOE in a secure manner.
        The operational user guidance shall describe, for each user role, the available functions and interfaces, in particular all security parameters under the control of the user, indicating secure values as appropriate.
        Application Note: This portion of the operational user guidance should be presented in the form of a checklist that can be quickly executed by IT personnel (or end-users, when necessary) and suitable for use in compliance activities. When possible, this guidance is to be expressed in the eXtensible Configuration Checklist Description Format (XCCDF) to support security automation. Minimally, it should be presented in a structured format which includes a title for each configuration item, instructions for achieving the secure configuration, and any relevant rationale.
        The operational user guidance shall, for each user role, clearly present each type of security-relevant event relative to the user-accessible functions that need to be performed, including changing the security characteristics of entities under the control of the TSF.
        The operational user guidance shall identify all possible modes of operation of the TOE (including operation following failure or operational error), their consequences, and implications for maintaining secure operation.
        The operational user guidance shall, for each user role, describe the security measures to be followed in order to fulfill the security objectives for the operational environment as described in the ST.
        The operational user guidance shall be clear and reasonable.

        Evaluator action elements:

        The evaluator shall confirm that the information provided meets all requirements for content and presentation of evidence.
        Some of the contents of the operational guidance are verified by the assurance activities in Section 5.1 Security Functional Requirements and evaluation of the OS according to the [CEM]. The following additional information is also required. If cryptographic functions are provided by the OS, the operational guidance shall contain instructions for configuring the cryptographic engine associated with the evaluated configuration of the OS. It shall provide a warning to the administrator that use of other cryptographic engines was not evaluated nor tested during the CC evaluation of the OS. The documentation must describe the process for verifying updates to the OS by verifying a digital signature – this may be done by the OS or the underlying platform. The evaluator will verify that this process includes the following steps: Instructions for obtaining the update itself. This should include instructions for making the update accessible to the OS (e.g., placement in a specific directory). Instructions for initiating the update process, as well as discerning whether the process was successful or unsuccessful. This includes generation of the hash/digital signature. The OS will likely contain security functionality that does not fall in the scope of evaluation under this PP. The operational guidance shall make it clear to an administrator which security functionality is covered by the evaluation activities.

        AGD_PRE.1 Preparative Procedures (AGD_PRE.1)

        Developer action elements:

        The developer shall provide the TOE, including its preparative procedures.

        Content and presentation elements:

        The preparative procedures shall describe all the steps necessary for secure acceptance of the delivered TOE in accordance with the developer's delivery procedures.
        The preparative procedures shall describe all the steps necessary for secure installation of the TOE and for the secure preparation of the operational environment in accordance with the security objectives for the operational environment as described in the ST.

        Evaluator action elements:

        The evaluator shall confirm that the information provided meets all requirements for content and presentation of evidence.
        The evaluator shall apply the preparative procedures to confirm that the TOE can be prepared securely for operation.

        5.2.3 Class ALC: Life-cycle Support

        At the assurance level provided for TOEs conformant to this PP, life-cycle support is limited to end-user-visible aspects of the life-cycle, rather than an examination of the TOE vendor’s development and configuration management process. This is not meant to diminish the critical role that a developer’s practices play in contributing to the overall trustworthiness of a product; rather, it is a reflection on the information to be made available for evaluation at this assurance level.

        ALC_CMC.1 Labeling of the TOE (ALC_CMC.1)

        This component is targeted at identifying the TOE such that it can be distinguished from other products or versions from the same vendor and can be easily specified when being procured by an end user.

        Developer action elements:

        The developer shall provide the TOE and a reference for the TOE.

        Content and presentation elements:

        The application shall be labeled with a unique reference.

        Evaluator action elements:

        The evaluator shall confirm that the information provided meets all requirements for content and presentation of evidence.
        The evaluator will check the ST to ensure that it contains an identifier (such as a product name/version number) that specifically identifies the version that meets the requirements of the ST. Further, the evaluator will check the AGD guidance and OS samples received for testing to ensure that the version number is consistent with that in the ST. If the vendor maintains a web site advertising the OS, the evaluator will examine the information on the web site to ensure that the information in the ST is sufficient to distinguish the product.

        ALC_CMS.1 TOE CM Coverage (ALC_CMS.1)

        Developer action elements:

        The developer shall provide a configuration list for the TOE.

        Content and presentation elements:

        The configuration list shall include the following: the TOE itself; and the evaluation evidence required by the SARs.
        The configuration list shall uniquely identify the configuration items.

        Evaluator action elements:

        The evaluator shall confirm that the information provided meets all requirements for content and presentation of evidence.
        The "evaluation evidence required by the SARs" in this PP is limited to the information in the ST coupled with the guidance provided to administrators and users under the AGD requirements. By ensuring that the OS is specifically identified and that this identification is consistent in the ST and in the AGD guidance (as done in the assurance activity for ALC_CMC.1), the evaluator implicitly confirms the information required by this component. Life-cycle support is targeted aspects of the developer’s life-cycle and instructions to providers of applications for the developer’s devices, rather than an in-depth examination of the TSF manufacturer’s development and configuration management process. This is not meant to diminish the critical role that a developer’s practices play in contributing to the overall trustworthiness of a product; rather, it’s a reflection on the information to be made available for evaluation.
        The evaluator will ensure that the developer has identified (in guidance documentation for application developers concerning the targeted platform) one or more development environments appropriate for use in developing applications for the developer’s platform. For each of these development environments, the developer shall provide information on how to configure the environment to ensure that buffer overflow protection mechanisms in the environment(s) are invoked (e.g., compiler and linker flags). The evaluator will ensure that this documentation also includes an indication of whether such protections are on by default, or have to be specifically enabled. The evaluator will ensure that the TSF is uniquely identified (with respect to other products from the TSF vendor), and that documentation provided by the developer in association with the requirements in the ST is associated with the TSF using this unique identification.

        5.2.4 Class ASE: ST Evaluation

        As per ASE activities defined in [CEM].

        ASE_CCL.1 Conformance Claims

        Developer action elements:

        The developer shall provide a conformance claim.
        The developer shall provide a conformance claim rationale.

        Content and presentation elements:

        The conformance claim shall identify the edition of the CC to which the ST and the TOE claim conformance.
        The conformance claim shall describe the conformance of the ST to CC Part 2 as either CC Part 2 conformant or CC Part 2 extended.
        The conformance claim shall describe the conformance of the ST as either “CC Part 3 conformant” or “CC Part 3 extended”.
        The conformance claim shall be consistent with the extended components definition.
        The conformance claim shall identify a PP-Configuration, or all PPs and security requirement packages to which the ST claims conformance.
        The conformance claim shall describe any conformance of the ST to a package as either package-conformant or package-augmented.
        The conformance claim shall describe any conformance of the ST to a PP as PP-Conformant.
        The conformance claim rationale shall demonstrate that the TOE type is consistent with the TOE type in the PP-Configuration or PPs for which conformance is being claimed.
        The conformance claim rationale shall demonstrate that the statement of the security problem definition is consistent with the statement of the security problem definition in the PP-Configuration, PPs and any functional packages for which conformance is being claimed.
        The conformance claim rationale shall demonstrate that the statement of security objectives is consistent with the statement of security objectives in the PP-Configuration, PPs, and any functional package for which conformance is being claimed.
        The conformance claim rationale shall demonstrate that the statement of security requirements is consistent with the statement of security requirements in the PP-Configuration, PPs, and any functional packages for which conformance is being claimed.
        The conformance claim for PP(s) or a PP-Configuration shall be exact, strict, or demonstrable or a list of conformance types.
        If the conformance claim identifies a set of Evaluation methods and Evaluation activities derived from CEM work units that shall be used to evaluate the TOE then this set shall include all those that are included in any package, PP, or PP-Module in a PP-Configuration to which the ST claims conformance, and no others.

        Evaluator action elements:

        The evaluator shall confirm that the information provided meets all requirements for content and presentation of evidence.

        ASE_ECD.1 Extended Components Definition

        Developer action elements:

        The developer shall provide a statement of security requirements.
        The developer shall provide an extended components definition.

        Content and presentation elements:

        The statement of security requirements shall identify all extended security requirements.
        The extended components definition shall define an extended component for each extended security requirement.
        The extended components definition shall describe how each extended component is related to the existing CC components, families, and classes.
        The extended components definition shall use the existing CC components, families, classes, and methodology as a model for presentation.
        The extended components shall consist of measurable and objective elements such that conformance or nonconformance to these elements may be demonstrated.

        Evaluator action elements:

        The evaluator shall confirm that the information provided meets all requirements for content and presentation of evidence.
        The evaluator shall confirm that no extended component may be clearly expressed using existing components.

        ASE_INT.1 ST Introduction

        Developer action elements:

        The developer shall provide an ST introduction.

        Content and presentation elements:

        The ST introduction shall contain an ST reference, a TOE reference, a TOE overview and a TOE description.
        The ST reference shall uniquely identify the ST.
        The TOE reference shall uniquely identify the TOE.
        The TOE overview shall summarize the usage and major security features of the TOE.
        The TOE overview shall identify the TOE type.
        The TOE overview shall identify any non-TOE hardware/software/firmware required by the TOE.
        For a multi-assurance ST, the TOE overview shall describe the TSF organization in terms of the sub-TSFs defined in the PP-Configuration the ST claims conformance to.
        The TOE description shall describe the physical scope of the TOE.
        The TOE description shall describe the logical scope of the TOE.

        Evaluator action elements:

        The evaluator shall confirm that the information provided meets all requirements for content and presentation of evidence.
        The evaluator shall confirm that the TOE reference, the TOE overview, and the TOE description are consistent with each other.

        ASE_OBJ.1 ST Objectives for the Operational Environment

        Developer action elements:

        The developer shall provide a statement of security objectives for the operational environment.
        The developer shall provide a security objectives rationale for the operational environment.

        Content and presentation elements:

        The statement of security objectives shall describe the security objectives for the operational environment.
        The security objectives rationale shall trace each security objective for the operational environment back to threats countered by that security objective, OSPs enforced by that security objective, and assumptions upheld by that security objective.
        The security objectives rationale shall demonstrate that the security objectives for the operational environment uphold all assumptions.

        Evaluator action elements:

        The evaluator shall confirm that the information provided meets all requirements for content and presentation of evidence.

        ASE_REQ.1 Stated Security Requirements

        Developer action elements:

        The developer shall provide a statement of security requirements.
        The developer shall provide a security requirements rationale.

        Content and presentation elements:

        The statement of security requirements shall describe the SFRs and the SARs.
        For a single-assurance ST, the statement of security requirements shall define the global set of SARs that apply to the entire TOE. The sets of SARs shall be consistent with the PPs or PP-Configuration to which the ST claims conformance.
        For a multi-assurance ST, the statement of security requirements shall define the global set of SARs that apply to the entire TOE and the sets of SARs that apply to each sub-TSF. The sets of SARs shall be consistent with the multi-assurance PP-Configuration to which the ST claims conformance.
        All subjects, objects, operations, security attributes, external entities and other terms that are used in the SFRs and the SARs shall be defined.
        The statement of security requirements shall identify all operations on the security requirements.
        All operations shall be performed correctly.
        Each dependency of the security requirements shall either be satisfied, or the security requirements rationale shall justify the dependency not being satisfied.
        The security requirements rationale shall demonstrate that the SFRs (in conjunction with the security objectives for the environment) counter all threats for the TOE.
        The security requirements rationale shall demonstrate that the SFRs (in conjunction with the security objectives for the environment) enforce all OSPs.
        The security requirements rationale shall explain why the SARs were chosen.
        The statement of security requirements shall be internally consistent.
        If the ST defines sets of SARs that expand the sets of SARs of the PPs or PP-Configuration it claims conformance to, the security requirements rationale shall include an assurance rationale that justifies the consistency of the extension and provides a rationale for the disposition of any Evaluation methods and Evaluation activities identified in the conformance statement that are affected by the extension of the sets of SARs

        Evaluator action elements:

        The evaluator shall confirm that the information provided meets all requirements for content and presentation of evidence.

        ASE_TSS.1 TOE Summary Specification

        Developer action elements:

        The developer shall provide a TOE summary specification.

        Content and presentation elements:

        The TOE summary specification shall describe how the TOE meets each SFR.

        Evaluator action elements:

        The evaluator shall confirm that the information provided meets all requirements for content and presentation of evidence.
        The evaluator shall confirm that the TOE summary specification is consistent with the TOE overview and the TOE description.

        5.2.5 Class ATE: Tests

        Testing is specified for functional aspects of the system as well as aspects that take advantage of design or implementation weaknesses. The former is done through the ATE_IND family, while the latter is through the AVA_VAN family. At the assurance level specified in this PP, testing is based on advertised functionality and interfaces with dependency on the availability of design information. One of the primary outputs of the evaluation process is the test report as specified in the following requirements.

        ATE_IND.1 Independent Testing – Conformance (ATE_IND.1)

        Testing is performed to confirm the functionality described in the TSS as well as the administrative (including configuration and operational) documentation provided. The focus of the testing is to confirm that the requirements specified in Section 5.1 Security Functional Requirements being met, although some additional testing is specified for SARs in Section 5.2 Security Assurance Requirements. The evaluation activities identify the additional testing activities associated with these components. The evaluator produces a test report documenting the plan for and results of testing, as well as coverage arguments focused on the platform/TOE combinations that are claiming conformance to this PP. Given the scope of the TOE and its associated evaluation evidence requirements, this component’s evaluation activities are covered by the evaluation activities listed for ALC_CMC.1.

        Developer action elements:

        The developer shall provide the TOE for testing.

        Content and presentation elements:

        The TOE shall be suitable for testing.

        Evaluator action elements:

        The evaluator shall confirm that the information provided meets all requirements for content and presentation of evidence.
        The evaluator shall test a subset of the TSF to confirm that the TSF operates as specified.
        Application Note: The evaluator will test the OS on the most current fully patched version of the platform.
        The evaluator will prepare a test plan and report documenting the testing aspects of the system, including any application crashes during testing. The evaluator shall determine the root cause of any application crashes and include that information in the report. The test plan covers all of the testing actions contained in the [CEM] and the body of this PP’s Assurance Activities.
        While it is not necessary to have one test case per test listed in an Assurance Activity, the evaluator must document in the test plan that each applicable testing requirement in the ST is covered. The test plan identifies the platforms to be tested, and for those platforms not included in the test plan but included in the ST, the test plan provides a justification for not testing the platforms. This justification must address the differences between the tested platforms and the untested platforms, and make an argument that the differences do not affect the testing to be performed. It is not sufficient to merely assert that the differences have no affect; rationale must be provided. If all platforms claimed in the ST are tested, then no rationale is necessary. The test plan describes the composition of each platform to be tested, and any setup that is necessary beyond what is contained in the AGD documentation. It should be noted that the evaluator is expected to follow the AGD documentation for installation and setup of each platform either as part of a test or as a standard pre-test condition. This may include special test drivers or tools. For each driver or tool, an argument (not just an assertion) should be provided that the driver or tool will not adversely affect the performance of the functionality by the OS and its platform.
        This also includes the configuration of the cryptographic engine to be used. The cryptographic algorithms implemented by this engine are those specified by this PP and used by the cryptographic protocols being evaluated (IPsec, TLS). The test plan identifies high-level test objectives as well as the test procedures to be followed to achieve those objectives. These procedures include expected results.
        The test report (which could just be an annotated version of the test plan) details the activities that took place when the test procedures were executed, and includes the actual results of the tests. This shall be a cumulative account, so if there was a test run that resulted in a failure; a fix installed; and then a successful re-run of the test, the report would show a “fail” and “pass” result (and the supporting details), and not just the “pass” result.

        5.2.6 Class AVA: Vulnerability Assessment

        For the current generation of this protection profile, the evaluation lab is expected to survey open sources to discover what vulnerabilities have been discovered in these types of products. In most cases, these vulnerabilities will require sophistication beyond that of a basic attacker. Until penetration tools are created and uniformly distributed to the evaluation labs, the evaluator will not be expected to test for these vulnerabilities in the TOE. The labs will be expected to comment on the likelihood of these vulnerabilities given the documentation provided by the vendor. This information will be used in the development of penetration testing tools and for the development of future protection profiles.

        AVA_VAN.1 Vulnerability Survey (AVA_VAN.1)

        Developer action elements:

        The developer shall provide the TOE for testing.

        Content and presentation elements:

        The TOE shall be suitable for testing.

        Evaluator action elements:

        The evaluator shall confirm that the information provided meets all requirements for content and presentation of evidence.
        The evaluator shall perform a search of public domain sources to identify potential vulnerabilities in the TOE.
        The evaluator shall conduct penetration testing, based on the identified potential vulnerabilities, to determine that the TOE is resistant to attacks performed by an attacker possessing Basic attack potential.

        Appendix A - Optional Requirements

        As indicated in the introduction to this PP, the baseline requirements (those that must be performed by the TOE) are contained in the body of this PP. This appendix contains three other types of optional requirements:

        The first type, defined in Appendix A.1 Strictly Optional Requirements, are strictly optional requirements. If the TOE meets any of these requirements the vendor is encouraged to claim the associated SFRs in the ST, but doing so is not required in order to conform to this PP.

        The second type, defined in Appendix A.2 Objective Requirements, are objective requirements. These describe security functionality that is not yet widely available in commercial technology. Objective requirements are not currently mandated by this PP, but will be mandated in the future. Adoption by vendors is encouraged, but claiming these SFRs is not required in order to conform to this PP.

        The third type, defined in Appendix A.3 Implementation-dependent Requirements, are Implementation-dependent requirements. If the TOE implements the product features associated with the listed SFRs, either the SFRs must be claimed or the product features must be disabled in the evaluated configuration.

        A.1 Strictly Optional Requirements

        A.1.1 Class ALC: Life-cycle Support

        ALC_FLR.1 Basic Flaw Remediation (ALC_FLR.1)

        This SAR is optional and may be claimed at the ST-Author's discretion.

        Developer action elements:

        The developer shall document and provide flaw remediation procedures addressed to TOE developers.

        Content and presentation elements:

        The flaw remediation procedures documentation shall describe the procedures used to track all reported security flaws in each release of the TOE.
        The flaw remediation procedures shall require that a description of the nature and effect of each security flaw be provided, as well as the status of finding a correction to that flaw.
        The flaw remediation procedures shall require that corrective actions be identified for each of the security flaws.
        The flaw remediation procedures documentation shall describe the methods used to provide flaw information, corrections and guidance on corrective actions to TOE users.

        Evaluator action elements:

        The evaluator shall confirm that the information provided meets all requirements for content and presentation of evidence.

        ALC_FLR.2 Flaw Reporting Procedures (ALC_FLR.2)

        This SAR is optional and may be claimed at the ST-Author's discretion.

        Developer action elements:

        The developer shall document and provide flaw remediation procedures addressed to TOE developers.
        The developer shall establish a procedure for accepting and acting upon all reports of security flaws and requests for corrections to those flaws.
        The developer shall provide flaw remediation guidance addressed to TOE users.

        Content and presentation elements:

        The flaw remediation procedures documentation shall describe the procedures used to track all reported security flaws in each release of the TOE.
        The flaw remediation procedures shall require that a description of the nature and effect of each security flaw be provided, as well as the status of finding a correction to that flaw.
        The flaw remediation procedures shall require that corrective actions be identified for each of the security flaws.
        The flaw remediation procedures documentation shall describe the methods used to provide flaw information, corrections and guidance on corrective actions to TOE users.
        The flaw remediation procedures shall describe a means by which the developer receives from TOE users reports and enquiries of suspected security flaws in the TOE.
        The procedures for processing reported security flaws shall ensure that any reported flaws are remediated and the remediation procedures issued to TOE users.
        The procedures for processing reported security flaws shall provide safeguards that any corrections to these security flaws do not introduce any new flaws.
        The flaw remediation guidance shall describe a means by which TOE users report to the developer any suspected security flaws in the TOE.

        Evaluator action elements:

        The evaluator shall confirm that the information provided meets all requirements for content and presentation of evidence.

        ALC_FLR.3 Systematic Flaw Remediation (ALC_FLR.3)

        This SAR is optional and may be claimed at the ST-Author's discretion.

        Developer action elements:

        The developer shall document and provide flaw remediation procedures addressed to TOE developers.
        The developer shall establish a procedure for accepting and acting upon all reports of security flaws and requests for corrections to those flaws.
        The developer shall provide flaw remediation guidance addressed to TOE users.

        Content and presentation elements:

        The flaw remediation procedures documentation shall describe the procedures used to track all reported security flaws in each release of the TOE.
        The flaw remediation procedures shall require that a description of the nature and effect of each security flaw be provided, as well as the status of finding a correction to that flaw.
        The flaw remediation procedures shall require that corrective actions be identified for each of the security flaws.
        The flaw remediation procedures documentation shall describe the methods used to provide flaw information, corrections and guidance on corrective actions to TOE users.
        The flaw remediation procedures shall describe a means by which the developer receives from TOE users reports and enquiries of suspected security flaws in the TOE.
        The flaw remediation procedures shall include a procedure requiring timely response and the automatic distribution of security flaw reports and the associated corrections to registered users who might be affected by the security flaw.
        The procedures for processing reported security flaws shall ensure that any reported flaws are remediated and the remediation procedures issued to TOE users.
        The procedures for processing reported security flaws shall provide safeguards that any corrections to these security flaws do not introduce any new flaws.
        The flaw remediation guidance shall describe a means by which TOE users report to the developer any suspected security flaws in the TOE.
        The flaw remediation guidance shall describe a means by which TOE users may register with the developer, to be eligible to receive security flaw reports and corrections.
        The flaw remediation guidance shall identify the specific points of contact for all reports and enquiries about security issues involving the TOE.

        Evaluator action elements:

        The evaluator shall confirm that the information provided meets all requirements for content and presentation of evidence.

        ALC_TSU_EXT.1 Timely Security Updates

        This SAR is optional and may be claimed at the ST-Author's discretion.
        This component requires the TOE developer, in conjunction with any other necessary parties, to provide information as to how the end-user devices are updated to address security issues in a timely manner. The documentation describes the process of providing updates to the public from the time a security flaw is reported/discovered, to the time an update is released. This description includes the parties involved (e.g., the developer, carriers(s)) and the steps that are performed (e.g., developer testing, carrier testing), including worst case time periods, before an update is made available to the public.

        Developer action elements:

        The developer shall provide a description in the TSS of how timely security updates are made to the TOE.
        The developer shall provide a description in the TSS of how users are notified when updates change security properties or the configuration of the product.

        Content and presentation elements:

        The description shall include the process for creating and deploying security updates for the TOE software.
        The description shall express the time window as the length of time, in days, between public disclosure of a vulnerability and the public availability of security updates to the TOE.
        The description shall include the mechanisms publicly available for reporting security issues pertaining to the TOE.

        Evaluator action elements:

        The evaluator shall confirm that the information provided meets all requirements for content and presentation of evidence.
        The evaluator will verify that the TSS contains a description of the timely security update process used by the developer to create and deploy security updates. The evaluator will verify that this description addresses the entire application. The evaluator will also verify that, in addition to the OS developer’s process, any third-party processes are also addressed in the description. The evaluator will also verify that each mechanism for deployment of security updates is described.
        The evaluator will verify that, for each deployment mechanism described for the update process, the TSS lists a time between public disclosure of a vulnerability and public availability of the security update to the OS patching this vulnerability, to include any third-party or carrier delays in deployment. The evaluator will verify that this time is expressed in a number or range of days.
        The evaluator will verify that this description includes the publicly available mechanisms (including either an email address or website) for reporting security issues related to the OS. The evaluator shall verify that the description of this mechanism includes a method for protecting the report either using a public key for encrypting email or a trusted channel for a website.

        A.1.2 Security Audit (FAU)

        FAU_STG.2 Protected Audit Data Storage

        The TSF shall protect the stored audit data in the audit trail from unauthorised deletion.

        The TSF shall be able to prevent unauthorised modifications to the stored audit data in the audit trail.

        256. The evaluator shall examine the TSS to ensure it describes the amount of audit data stored locally and how it is protected against unauthorised modification or deletion. The evaluator shall verify that the TSS describes the conditions that must be met for authorised deletion of audit records.

        257. For distributed TOEs, the evaluator shall examine the TSS to ensure it describes to which TOE components this SFR applies and how local storage is implemented among the different TOE components (e.g., every TOE component either provides its own local storage, or the data is sent to another TOE component for central local storage of all audit events).

        Guidance

        258. The evaluator shall examine the guidance documentation to determine if it describes any configuration required for protection of the locally stored audit data against unauthorised modification or deletion.

        Tests

        259. The evaluator shall perform the following tests:


        260. For distributed TOEs, the evaluator shall perform test 1 and test 2 for each component that is defined by the TSS to be covered by this SFR.

        • Test FAU_STG.2:1:

          Test 1: The evaluator shall attempt to access the audit trail without authentication as a Security Administrator (either by authentication as a non-administrative user, if supported, or without authentication at all) and attempt to modify and delete the audit records. The evaluator shall verify that these attempts fail.

          In the case that no other users than the Security Administrator can be defined, without user authentication the user may not be able to get to the point where the attempt to access the audit trail can be executed. In this case it shall be demonstrated that access control mechanisms prevent execution up to the step that can be reached without authentication as Security Administrator.

        • Test FAU_STG.2:2:

          Test 2: The evaluator shall access the audit trail as an authenticated Security Administrator and attempt to delete the audit records (if supported by the TOE, and to the extent described in the TSS). The evaluator shall verify that these attempts succeed. The evaluator shall verify that only the records authorised for deletion are deleted.

        FAU_STG_EXT.2 Counting Lost Audit Data

        The TSF shall provide information about the number of [selection: dropped, overwritten, [assignment: other information]] audit records in the case where the local storage has been filled and the TSF takes one of the actions defined in FAU_STG_EXT.1.5.
        Application Note:

        Application Note 41

        This option should be chosen if the TOE supports this functionality.

        In case the local storage for audit records is cleared by the Administrator, the counters associated with the selection in the SFR should be reset to their initial value (most likely to 0). The guidance documentation should contain a warning for the Administrator about the loss of audit data when he clears the local storage for audit records.

        For distributed TOEs, each component that implements counting of lost audit data has to provide a mechanism for Administrator access to, and management of, this information.

        If FAU_STG_EXT.2 is added to the ST, the ST has to make clear any situations in which lost audit data is not counted.

        261. This activity should be accomplished in conjunction with the testing of FAU_STG_EXT.1.4 and FAU_STG_EXT.1.5.

        262. The evaluator shall examine the TSS to ensure that it details the possible options the TOE supports for information about the number of audit records that have been dropped, overwritten, etc. when the local storage for audit data is full.

        263. For distributed TOEs, the evaluator shall examine the TSS to ensure it describes to which TOE components this SFR applies. Since this SFR is optional, it might only apply to some TOE components and not all. This might lead to the situation where all TOE components store their audit information themselves but FAU_STG_EXT.2 is supported only by one of the components.

        Guidance

        264. The evaluator shall also ensure that the guidance documentation describes all possible configuration options and the meaning of the result returned by the TOE for each possible configuration. The description of possible configuration options and explanation of the result shall correspond to those described in the TSS.

        265. The evaluator shall verify that the guidance documentation contains a warning for the administrator about the loss of audit data when clearing the local storage for audit records.

        Tests

        • Test FAU_STG_EXT.2:1:

          266. The evaluator shall verify that the numbers provided by the TOE according to the selection for FAU_STG_EXT.2 are correct when performing the tests for FAU_STG_EXT.1.5.

        • The following content should be included if:
          • the TOE implements "Distributed TOE"

          267. For distributed TOEs, the evaluator shall verify the correct implementation of counting of lost audit data for all TOE components that are supporting this feature, according to the description in the TSS.

        FAU_STG_EXT.3 Action in Case of Possible Audit Data Loss

        The TSF shall generate a warning to inform the Administrator before the audit trail exceeds the local audit trail storage capacity.
        Application Note:

        Application Note 42

        This option should be chosen if the TOE generates a warning to inform the Administrator before the local storage space for audit data is used up. This SFR only applies to local storage of audit information.

        It has to be ensured that the warning message required by FAU_STG_EXT.3.1 can be communicated to the Administrator. The communication should be done via the audit log itself because it cannot be guaranteed that an administrative session is active at the time the event occurs.

        The warning should inform the Administrator when the local space to store audit data is used up and/or the TOE will lose audit data due to insufficient local space.

        For distributed TOEs, that implement displaying a warning when local storage space for audit data is exhausted, it has to be described which TOE components support this feature (not necessarily all TOE components have to support this feature if selected for the overall TOE). Each component that supports this feature must either generate a warning itself or through another component.

        If FAU_STG_EXT.3 is added to the ST, the ST has to make clear any situations in which audit records might be “invisibly lost”.

        268. This activity should be accomplished in conjunction with the testing of FAU_STG_EXT.1.4 and FAU_STG_EXT.1.5.

        269. The evaluator shall examine the TSS to ensure that it details how the Security Administrator is warned before the local storage for audit data is full.

        270. For distributed TOEs, the evaluator shall examine the TSS to ensure it describes to which TOE components this SFR applies and how each TOE component implements this SFR. Since this SFR is optional, it might only apply to some TOE components and not all. This might lead to the situation where all TOE components store their audit information themselves but FAU_STG_EXT.3 is supported only by one of the components. In particular, the evaluator shall verify that the TSS describes for every component supporting this functionality, whether the warning is generated by the component itself or through another component and name the corresponding component in the latter case. The evaluator shall verify that the TSS makes clear any situations in which audit records might be 'invisibly lost'.

        Guidance

        271. The evaluator shall also verify that the guidance documentation describes how the Security Administrator is warned before the local storage for audit data is full and how this warning is displayed or stored (since there is no guarantee that an administrator session is running at the time the warning is issued, it is very likely that it will be stored in the log files). The description in the guidance documentation shall correspond to the description in the TSS.

        Tests

        • Test FAU_STG_EXT.3:1:

          272. The evaluator shall verify that a warning is issued by the TOE before the local storage space for audit data is full.

        • The following content should be included if:
          • the TOE implements "Distributed TOE"

          273. For distributed TOEs, the evaluator shall verify the correct implementation of display warning for local storage space for all TOE components that are supporting this feature according to the description in the TSS. The evaluator shall verify that each component that supports this feature according to the description in the TSS is capable of generating a warning itself or through another component.

        A.1.3 Communication (FCO)

        FCO_CPC_EXT.1 Component Registration Channel Definition

        The TSF shall require a Security Administrator to enable communications between any pair of TOE components before such communication can take place.
        The TSF shall implement a registration process in which components establish and use a communications channel that uses [assignment: list of different types of channel given in the form of a selection] for at least [assignment: type of data for which the channel must be used].
        The TSF shall enable a Security Administrator to disable communications between any pair of TOE components.
        Application Note:

        Application Note 46

        This SFR is only applicable if the TOE is distributed and therefore has multiple components that need to communicate via an internal TSF channel. When creating the TSF from the initial pair of components, either of these components may be identified as the TSF for the purposes of satisfying the meaning of ‘TSF’ in this SFR.

        The intention of this requirement is to ensure that there is a registration process that includes a positive enablement step by an Administrator before components joining a distributed TOE can communicate with the other components of the TOE and before the new component can act as part of the TSF. The registration process may itself involve communication with the joining component: many Network Devices use a bespoke process for this, and the security requirements for the ‘registration communication’ are then defined in FCO_CPC_EXT.1.2. Use of this ‘registration communication’ channel is not deemed inconsistent with the requirement of FCO_CPC_EXT.1.1 (i.e., the registration channel can be used before the enablement step, but only in order to complete the registration process).

        The channel selection (for the registration channel) in FCO_CPC_EXT.1.2 is essentially a choice between the use of a normal secure channel that is equivalent to a channel used to communicate with external IT entities (FTP_ITC.1) or existing TOE components (FPT_ITT.1), or else a separate type of channel that is specific to registration (FTP_TRP.1/Join). If the TOE does not require a communications channel for registration (e.g., because the registration is achieved entirely by configuration actions by an Administrator at each of the components) then the main selection in FCO_CPC_EXT.1.2 is completed with the ‘No channel’ option.

        If the ST author selects the FTP_ITC.1/FPT_ITT.1 channel type in the main selection in FCO_CPC_EXT.1.2 then the TSS identifies the relevant SFR iteration that specifies the channel used. If the ST author selects the FTP_TRP.1/Join channel type, then the TOE Summary Specification (possibly with support from the operational guidance) describes details of the channel and the mechanisms that it uses (and describes how the registration process ensures that the channel can only be used by the intended joiner and gatekeeper). Note: The FTP_TRP.1/Join channel type may require support from security measures in the operational environment (see the definition of FTP_TRP.1/Join for details).

        If the ST author selects the FTP_ITC.1/FPT_ITT.1 channel type in the main selection in FCO_CPC_EXT.1.2 then the ST identifies the registration channel as a separate iteration of FTP_ITC.1 or FPT_ITT.1 and gives the iteration identifier (e.g., “FPT_ITT.1/Join”) in an ST Application Note for FCO_CPC_EXT.1.

        Note: The channel set up and used for registration may be adopted as a continuing internal communication channel (i.e., between different TOE components) provided that the channel meets the requirements of FTP_ITC.1 or FPT_ITT.1. Otherwise, the registration channel is closed after use, and a separate channel is used for the internal communications.

        Specific requirements for Preparative Procedures relating to FCO_CPC_EXT.1 are defined in the Evaluation Activities in [SD].

        290. If the TOE is not a distributed TOE, then no evaluator action is necessary. For a distributed TOE the evaluator carries out the activities below. In carrying out these activities the evaluator shall determine answers to the following questions based on a combination of documentation analysis and testing (possibly also using input from carrying out the Evaluation Activities for the relevant registration channel, such as FTP_TRP.1/Join), and shall report the answers.

        1. What stops[5] a TOE component from successfully communicating with other TOE components (in a way that enables it to participate as part of the TOE) before it has been properly authenticated and becomes a functional part of the distributed TOE?

        2. What is the enablement step? (Describe what interface it uses, with a reference to the relevant section and step in the operational guidance).

          1. i. What stops anybody other than a Security Administrator from carrying out this step?

          2. ii. How does the Security Administrator know that they are enabling the intended TOE component to join? (Identification of the joiner might be part of the enablement action itself or might be part of secure channel establishment, but it must prevent unintended joining of components)

        3. What stops a TOE component from successfully joining if the Security Administrator has not carried out the enablement step; or, equivalently, how does the distributed TOE ensure that an action by an authentic Security Administrator is required before a component can successfully join?

        4. What stops a TOE component from carrying out the registration process over a different, insecure channel?

        5. If the FTP_TRP.1/Join channel type is selected in FCO_CPC_EXT.1.2 then how does the registration process, and its resulting secure channel, ensure that the transmitted data is protected from disclosure and that it provides detection of modification?

        6. Where the registration channel does not rely on protection of the registration environment, does the registration channel provide a sufficient level of protection (especially with regard to confidentiality) for the data that passes over it?

        7. Where the registration channel is subsequently used for normal internal communication between TOE components (i.e. after the joiner has completed registration), do any of the authentication or encryption features of the registration channel result in use of a channel that has weaker protection than the normal FPT_ITT.1 requirements for such a channel?

        8. What is the disablement step? (Describe what interface it uses, with a reference to the relevant section and step in the operational guidance).

        9. What stops a TOE component from successfully communicating with other TOE components if the Security Administrator has carried out the disablement step?

        <should be Distributed TOE-dependent.>

        291. (Note: Section 3.4.1 lists questions for which the evaluator shall determine and report answers through the combination of the TSS, Guidance Documentation, and Tests Evaluation Activities.)

        292. The evaluator shall examine the TSS to confirm that it:

        1. Describes the method by which a Security Administrator enables and disables communications between pairs of TOE components.

        2. Describes the relevant details according to the type of channel in the main selection made in FCO_CPC_EXT.1.2:

          • First type: the TSS identifies the relevant SFR iteration that specifies the type of channel being used

          • Second type: the TSS (with support from the operational guidance if selected in FTP_TRP.1.3/Join) provides details of the channel and the mechanisms that it uses (and describes how the process ensures that the key is unique to the pair of components) – see also the Evaluation Activities for FTP_TRP.1/Join.

        293. The evaluator shall verify that if any aspects of the registration channel are identified as not meeting FTP_ITC.1 or FPT_ITT.1, then the ST has also selected the FTP_TRP.1/Join option in the main selection in FCO_CPC_EXT.1.2. If the registration channel is also to be used for other communications then FTP_TRP.1/Join cannot be present in the ST.

        Guidance

        <should be Distributed TOE-dependent.>

        294. (Note: Section 3.4.1 lists questions for which the evaluator shall determine and report answers through the combination of the TSS, Guidance Documentation, and Tests Evaluation Activities.)

        295. The evaluator shall examine the guidance documentation to confirm that it contains instructions for enabling and disabling communications with any individual component of a distributed TOE. The evaluator shall confirm that the method of disabling is such that all other components will be prevented from communicating with the component that is being removed from the TOE (preventing the remaining components from either attempting to initiate communications with the disabled component, or from responding to communications from the disabled component).

        296. The evaluator shall examine the guidance documentation to confirm that it includes recovery instructions should a connection between TOE components be unintentionally broken during the registration process.

        297. If the TOE uses a registration channel for registering components to the TOE (i.e., where the ST author uses the FTP_ITC.1/FPT_ITT.1 or FTP_TRP.1/Join channel types in the main selection for FCO_CPC_EXT.1.2) then the evaluator shall examine the Preparative Procedures to confirm that they:

        1. describe the security characteristics of the registration channel (e.g., the protocol, keys and authentication data on which it is based) and that they highlight any aspects which do not meet the requirements for a steady-state inter-component channel (as in FTP_ITC.1 or FPT_ITT.1)

        2. identify any dependencies between the configuration of the registration channel and the security of the subsequent intercomponent communications (e.g., where AES-256 inter-component communications depend on transmitting 256-bit keys between components and therefore rely on the registration channel being configured to use an encryption key of equivalent length)

        3. identify any aspects of the channel that can be modified by the operational environment in order to improve the channel’s security, and that they describe how this modification can be achieved (e.g., generating a new key pair, or replacing a default public key certificate).

        298. As background for the examination of the registration channel description, it is noted that the requirements above are intended to ensure that administrators can make an accurate judgement of any risks that arise from the default registration process. Examples would be the use of self-signed certificates (i.e., certificates that are not chained to an external or local Certification Authority), manufacturer-issued certificates (where control over aspects such as revocation, or which devices are issued with recognised certificates, is outside the control of the operational environment), use of generic/non-unique keys (e.g., where the same key is present on more than one instance of a device), or well-known keys (i.e., where the confidentiality of the keys is not intended to be strongly protected – note that this need not mean there is a positive action or intention to publicise the keys).

        299. In the case of a distributed TOE for which the ST author uses the FTP_TRP.1/Join channel type in the main selection for FCO_CPC_EXT.1.2 and the TOE relies on the operational environment to provide security for some aspects of the registration channel security then there are additional requirements on the Preparative Procedures as described in Section 3.4.1.2.

        Tests

        300. (Note: Section 3.4.1 lists questions for which the evaluator shall determine and report answers through the combination of the TSS, Guidance Documentation, and Tests Evaluation Activities.)

        301. The evaluator shall perform the following tests:





        • Test FCO_CPC_EXT.1:1:

          Test 1a: the evaluator shall confirm that a TOE component that is not currently a member of the distributed TOE cannot communicate with any other component of the TOE until the non-member is enabled by a Security Administrator, for each of the non-equivalent TOE components[6], that it is required to communicate with (nonequivalent TOE components are as defined in the minimum configuration for the distributed TOE).

          Test 1b: the evaluator shall confirm that after enablement, a TOE component can only communicate with the other TOE components that it has been enabled for. This includes testing that the enabled communication is successful for the enabled TOE component pair, and that communication remains unsuccessful with any other TOE component for which communication has not been explicitly enabled.

          Some TOEs may set up the registration channel before the enablement step is carried out, but in such a case the separate registeredcomponents channel must not allow communications until after the enablement step has been completed.

          302. The evaluator shall repeat Tests 1a and 1b for each different type of enablement process that can be used in the distributed TOE.

        • Test FCO_CPC_EXT.1:2:

          Test 2: The evaluator shall separately disable each TOE component in turn and ensure that the other TOE components cannot then communicate with the disabled component, whether by attempting to initiate communications with the disabled component, or by responding to communication attempts from the disabled component.

        • Test FCO_CPC_EXT.1:3:

          Test 3: The evaluator shall perform the following tests according to those that apply to the values of the main (outer) selection made in the ST for FCO_CPC_EXT.1.2.

          If the ST uses the first type of communication channel in the selection list in FCO_CPC_EXT.1.2 then the evaluator shall test the channel via the Evaluation Activities for FTP_ITC.1 or FPT_ITT.1 according to the second selection list in FCO_CPC_EXT.1.2 (which is contained within the first type), therefore the evaluator shall ensure that the test coverage for these SFRs includes their usage in the registration process.

          If the ST uses the second type of communication channel in the selection in FCO_CPC_EXT.1.2 then the evaluator shall test the channel via the Evaluation Activities for FTP_TRP.1/Join.

          If the ST uses the ‘no channel’ selection, then no test is required.

          • Test FCO_CPC_EXT.1:4:

            Test 4: The evaluator shall perform one of the following tests, according to the TOE characteristics identified in its TSS and operational guidance:

            If the registration channel is not subsequently used for inter-component communication, and in all cases where the second selection in FCO_CPC_EXT.1.2 is made (i.e., using FTP_TRP.1/Join) then the evaluator shall confirm that the registration channel can no longer be used after the registration process has completed, by attempting to use the channel to communicate with each of the endpoints after registration has completed.

            If the registration channel is subsequently used for intercomponent communication then the evaluator shall confirm that any aspects identified in the operational guidance as necessary to meet the requirements for a steady-state intercomponent channel (as in FTP_ITC.1 or FPT_ITT.1) can indeed be carried out (e.g., there might be a requirement to replace the default key pair and/or public key certificate).

            • Test FCO_CPC_EXT.1:5:

              Test 5: For each aspect of the security of the registration channel that operational guidance states can be modified by the operational environment in order to improve the channel security (see AGD_PRE.1 refinement item 2 in (see the requirements on Preparative Procedures in 3.4.1.2), the evaluator shall confirm, by following the procedure described in the operational guidance, that this modification can be successfully carried out.

            A.1.4 Cryptographic Support (FCS)

            FCS_CKM.2 Cryptographic Key Distribution

            The TSF shall perform cryptographic key establishment in accordance with a specified cryptographic key establishment method:

            [selection: key encapsulation, key wrapping, encrypted channels] that meets the following: none.
            Application Note:

            Application Note 43

            This requirement specifies key transport schemes. For key agreement see FCS_CKM_EXT.7. Key transport schemes refer to cases in which one party has a key to share with another party. Key encapsulation is used when ML-KEM is used as the method of key establishment. Key wrapping and encrypted channels are used in support of wireless LAN communications. Key wrapping is also used in support of MACsec.

            If “key encapsulation” is selected, FCS_COP.1/KeyEncap from Annex B must be claimed, which specifies the relevant list of standards.

            If “key wrapping” is selected, FCS_COP.1/KeyWrap from Annex B must be claimed, which specifies the relevant list of standards.

            274. The evaluator shall ensure that the TSS documents that the security strength supported by the selected key distribution methods is sufficient for the security strength of the keys distributed through those methods.

            275. It is not necessary to identify the services that use each key distribution method here. That information should be documented in the requirements for the individual services and protocols that invoke key distribution.

            Guidance

            276. The evaluator shall verify that the AGD guidance instructs the administrator how to configure the TOE to use the selected key distribution methods.

            Tests

            277. Specific testing for this component is covered by testing for the claimed components in FCS_COP.1/KeyEncap, FCS_COP.1/KeyWrap, and the applicable key establishment or key derivation mechanisms claimed under FCS_CKM.1/AKG, FCS_CKM.5, FCS_CKM_EXT.8, or FCS_CKM_EXT.3.

            A.1.5 Protection of the TSF (FPT)

            FPT_ITT.1 Basic internal TSF data transfer protection (Refinement)

            The TSF shall protect TSF data from disclosure and detect its modification when it is transmitted between separate parts of the TOE through the use of

            [selection: IPsec, SSH as defined in the Functional Package for SSH, TLS as defined in the Functional Package for TLS, DTLS as defined in the Functional Package for TLS, HTTPS].
            Application Note:

            Application Note 44

            This requirement is only applicable to distributed TOEs and ensures that all communications between components of the distributed TOE are protected through the use of an encrypted communications channel. The data passed in this trusted communication channel are encrypted as defined by the protocol chosen in the selection. The ST author should identify the channels and protocols used by each pair of communicating components in a distributed TOE, iterating this SFR as appropriate.

            This channel may also be used as the registration channel for the registration process, as described in Section 3.3 and FCO_CPC_EXT.1.2.

            If "TLS" or "DTLS" is selected, then the TSF is validated against the applicable requirements of the Functional Package for TLS. Additionally, the reference identifier established for the server (FCS_DTLSC_EXT.1.5 or FCS_TLSC_EXT.1.5 in the Functional Package for TLS) may be established through a “gatekeeper” discovery process. The TSS should describe the discovery process and highlight how the reference identifier is supplied to the “joining” component.

            If "SSH" is selected, then the TSF is validated against the applicable requirements of the Functional Package for SSH.

            See Section B.4.1 for additional requirements.

            278. If the TOE is not a distributed TOE, then no evaluator action is necessary. For a distributed TOE the evaluator carries out the activities below.

            279. The evaluator shall examine the TSS to determine that, for all communications between components of a distributed TOE, each communications mechanism is identified in terms of the allowed protocols for inter-component communication. The evaluator shall also confirm that all protocols listed in the TSS for these inter-component communications are specified and included in the requirements in the ST.

            Guidance

            280. The evaluator shall confirm that the guidance documentation contains instructions for establishing the relevant allowed communication channels and protocols between each pair of authorised TOE components, and that it contains recovery instructions should a connection be unintentionally broken.

            Tests

            281. The evaluator shall perform the following tests:



              The following content should be included if:
              • the TOE implements "Distributed TOE"

              Test 1: The evaluator shall ensure that each communications channel established using each protocol between each pair of distributed TOE components is tested during the course of the evaluation, setting up the connections as described in the guidance documentation and verifying that communication is successful.

              The following content should be included if:
              • the TOE implements "Distributed TOE"

              Test 2: The evaluator shall verify that for each communication channel established between distributed TOE components, the channel data is not sent in plaintext.

              The following content should be included if:
              • the TOE implements "Distributed TOE"

              Test 3: Objective: This test is to ensure that the TOE reacts appropriately to any connection outage or interruption of the route between distributed TOE components.

              The evaluator shall ensure that, for each different pair of nonequivalent TOE component types, the connection is physically interrupted for the following durations: i) a duration that exceeds the TOE’s application layer timeout setting, ii) a duration that is shorter than the application layer timeout but is of sufficient length to interrupt the network link layer.

              The evaluator shall verify that when physical connectivity is restored between distributed TOE components, either communications are appropriately protected, or the secure channel is terminated and the registration process (as described in the FTP_TRP.1/Join) is reinitiated, with the TOE generating adequate warnings to alert the Security Administrator.

              In the case that the TOE is able to detect when the cable is removed from the device, another physical network device (e.g., a core switch) shall be used to interrupt the connection between the components.

              For a non-virtualized TOE, the interruption shall not be performed at the virtual node (e.g., virtual switch) and must be physical in nature.

            282. Further assurance activities are associated with the specific protocols identified in the ST.

            A.1.6 Trusted Channel (FTP_ITC)

            FTP_TRP.1/Join Trusted Path (Refinement)

            The TSF shall provide a communication path between itself and a joining component [selection: remote, local] users that is logically distinct from other communication paths and provides assured identification of

            [selection: the TSF endpoint, both joining component and TSF endpoint]

            its endpoints and protection of the communicated data from modification and

            [selection: disclosure, no other mechanisms].
            The TSF shall permit [selection: the TSF, the joining component] to initiate communication via the trusted path.

            The TSF shall require the use of the trusted path for joining components to the TSF under environmental constraints identified in

            [assignment: reference to operational guidance].
            Application Note:

            Application Note 45

            This SFR implements one of the types of channel identified in the main selection for FCO_CPC_EXT.1.2. The “joining component” in FTP_TRP.1/Join is the IT entity that is attempting to join the distributed TOE by using the registration process.

            The effect of this SFR is to require the ability for components to communicate in a secure manner while the distributed TSF is being created (or when adding components to an existing distributed TSF). When creating the TSF from the initial pair of components, either of these components may be identified as the TSF for the purposes of satisfying the meaning of ‘TSF’ in this SFR.

            The selection at the end of FTP_TRP.1.1/Join recognises that in some cases confidentiality (i.e., protection of the data from disclosure) may not be provided by the channel. The ST author distinguishes in the TSS whether in this case the TOE relies on the environment to provide confidentiality (as part of the constraints referenced in FTP_TRP.1.3/Join) or whether the registration data exchanged does not require confidentiality (in which case this assertion must be justified). If ‘no other mechanisms’ is selected, the ST author may omit this phrase in the completed SFR text to improve readability.

            The assignment in FTP_TRP.1.3/Join ensures that the ST highlights any specific details needed to protect the registration environment.

            Note: When the ST uses FTP_TRP.1/Join for the registration channel then this channel cannot be reused as the normal inter-component communication channel (the latter channel must meet FTP_ITC.1 or FPT_ITT.1).

            The trusted path used for joining might utilise X.509 certificates; however, there are no required X.509 SFRs associated with this trusted path as there are many ways the security of the joining path could be provided. It is up to the ST author to describe how the security of this trusted path is implemented; whether the security relies on X.509 SFRs, environmental constraints from FTP_TRP.1.3/Join, and/or some other method.

            See Section B.4.1 for additional requirements.

            Specific requirements for Preparative Procedures relating to FTP_TRP.1/Join are defined in the Evaluation Activities in [SD].

            283. The evaluator shall examine the TSS to determine that the methods of joining components to the TOE are identified, along with how communications with those newly-joined components are protected, including identification of whether the environment is required to provide confidentiality of the communications or whether the registration data exchanged does not require confidentiality. If the TSS asserts that registration data does not require confidentiality protection, then the evaluator shall examine the justification provided to confirm that.

            284. The evaluator shall also check that all protocols listed in the TSS in support of this process are included in the SFRs in the ST, and that if the ST uses FTP_TRP.1/Join for the registration channel then this channel cannot be reused as the normal inter-component communication channel (the latter channel must meet FTP_ITC.1 or FPT_ITT.1).

            285. The evaluator shall examine the TSS to confirm that sufficient information is provided to determine the TOE actions in the case that the initial component joining attempt fails.

            Guidance

            286. The evaluator shall examine the guidance documentation to confirm that it contains instructions for establishing and using the enablement and registration channel. The evaluator shall confirm that the guidance documentation clarifies which TOE component initiates the communication. The evaluator shall confirm that the guidance documentation contains recovery instructions should a connection be unintentionally broken during the registration process.

            287. In the case of a distributed TOE that relies on the operational environment to provide security for some aspects of the registration channel security, there are particular requirements on the Preparative Procedures as listed below. (Reliance on the operational environment in this way is indicated in an ST by a reference to operational guidance in the assignment in FTP_TRP.1.3/Join.) In this case the evaluator shall examine the Preparative Procedures to confirm that they:

            1. Clearly state the strength of the authentication and encryption provided by the registration channel itself and the specific requirements on the environment used for joining TOE components to the distributed TOE (e.g., where the environment is relied upon to prevent interception of sensitive messages, IP spoofing attempts, man-in-the-middle attacks, or race conditions).

            2. Identify what confidential values are transmitted over the enablement channel (e.g., any keys, their lengths, and their purposes), use of any non-confidential keys (e.g., where a developer uses the same key for more than one device or across all devices of a type or family), and use of any unauthenticated identification data (e.g., IP addresses, selfsigned certificates).

            3. Highlight any situation in which a secret value/key may be transmitted over a channel that uses a key of lower comparable strength than the transmitted value/key. Comparable strength is defined as the amount of work required to compromise the algorithm or key and is typically expressed as ‘bits’ of security. The ST author and evaluator shall consult NIST 800-57 Table 2 for further guidance on comparable algorithm strength.

            Tests

            288. The evaluator shall perform the following tests:



            • Test FTP_TRP.1/Join:1:

              Test 1: The evaluator shall ensure that the communications path for joining components to the TSF is tested for each distinct (nonequivalent) component type[4], setting up the connections as described in the guidance documentation and verifying that communication is successful. In particular the evaluator shall confirm that requirements on environment protection for the registration process are consistent with observations made on the test configuration (for example, a requirement to isolate the TOE components from the Internet during registration might be inconsistent with the need for a TOE component to contact a license server). If no requirements on the registration environment are identified as necessary to protect confidentiality, then the evaluator shall confirm that the key used for registration can be configured (following the instructions in the guidance documentation) to be at least the same length as the key used for the internal TSF channel that is being enabled. The evaluator shall confirm that the key used for the channel is unique to the pair of TOE components (this is done by identifying the relevant key during the registration test: it is not necessary to examine the key value).

            • Test FTP_TRP.1/Join:2:

              Test 2: The evaluator shall follow the guidance documentation to ensure that the communication channel can be enabled by a Security Administrator for all the TOE components identified in the guidance documentation as capable of having the Security Administrator initiate the channel.

            • Test FTP_TRP.1/Join:3:

              Test 3: The evaluator shall ensure that if the guidance documentation states that the channel data is encrypted, then the data observed on the channel is not plaintext.

            289. Further assurance activities are associated with the specific protocols.

            A.2 Objective Requirements

            This PP does not define any Objective requirements.

            A.3 Implementation-dependent Requirements

            A.3.1 Identification and Authentication (FIA)

            FIA_AFL.1 Authentication Failure Management (Refinement)

            This component must be included in the ST if the TOE implements any of the following features:

            The TSF shall detect when an Administrator configurable positive integer within

            [assignment: range of acceptable values]

            unsuccessful authentication attempts occur related to Administrators attempting to authenticate remotely using a password.

            When the defined number of unsuccessful authentication attempts has been met, the TSF shall

            [selection: prevent the offending Administrator from successfully establishing a remote session using any authentication method that involves a password until [assignment: action to unlock] is taken by an Administrator, prevent the offending Administrator from successfully establishing a remote session using any authentication method that involves a password until an Administrator defined time period has elapsed].
            Application Note:

            Application Note 74

            This requirement applies to a defined number of successive unsuccessful remote password-based authentication attempts and does not apply to local Administrative access, since it does not make sense to lock a local Administrator’s account in this fashion. Compliant TOEs may optionally include cryptographic authentication failures and/or local authentication failures in the number of unsuccessful authentication attempts. This could be addressed by (for example) requiring a separate account for local Administrators or having the authentication mechanism implementation distinguish local and remote login attempts. The ‘action’ taken by a local Administrator is implementation specific and would be defined in the Administrator guidance (for example, lockout reset, or password reset). The ST author chooses one or both of the selections for handling of authentication failures depending on how the TOE has implemented this handler.

            The TSS describes how the TOE ensures that authentication failures by remote Administrators cannot lead to a situation where no Administrator access is available, either permanently or temporarily (e.g., by providing local logon, which is not subject to blocking, or by allowing a reboot to clear the lockout status and restore administrator access). The Operational Guidance describes, and identifies the importance of, any actions that are required in order to ensure that Administrator access will always be maintained, even if remote administration is made permanently or temporarily unavailable due to blocking of accounts as a result of FIA_AFL.1.

            465. The evaluator shall examine the TSS to determine that it contains a description, for each supported method for remote administrative actions, of how successive unsuccessful authentication attempts are detected and tracked. The TSS shall also describe the method by which the remote administrator is prevented from successfully logging on to the TOE, and the actions necessary to restore this ability.

            466. The evaluator shall examine the TSS to confirm that the TOE ensures that authentication failures by remote administrators cannot lead to a situation where no administrator access is available, either permanently or temporarily (e.g., by providing local logon which is not subject to blocking).

            Guidance

            467. The evaluator shall examine the guidance documentation to ensure that instructions for configuring the number of successive unsuccessful authentication attempts and time period (if implemented) are provided, and that the process of allowing the remote administrator to once again successfully log on is described for each “action” specified (if that option is chosen). If different actions or mechanisms are implemented depending on the secure protocol employed (e.g., TLS vs. SSH), all must be described.

            468. The evaluator shall examine the guidance documentation to confirm that it describes, and identifies the importance of, any actions that are required in order to ensure that administrator access will always be maintained, even if remote administration is made permanently or temporarily unavailable due to blocking of accounts as a result of FIA_AFL.1.

            Tests

            469. The evaluator shall perform the following tests for each method by which remote administrators access the TOE (e.g., any passwords entered as part of establishing the connection protocol or the remote administrator application):


            • Test FIA_AFL.1:1:

              Test 1: The evaluator shall use the operational guidance to configure the number of successive unsuccessful authentication attempts allowed by the TOE (and, if the time period selection in FIA_AFL.1.2 is included in the ST, then the evaluator shall also use the operational guidance to configure the time period after which access is reenabled). The evaluator shall test that once the authentication attempts limit is reached, authentication attempts with valid credentials are no longer successful.

            • Test FIA_AFL.1:2:

              Test 2: After reaching the limit for unsuccessful authentication attempts as in Test 1 above, the evaluator shall proceed as follows

              If the administrator action selection in FIA_AFL.1.2 is included in the ST, then the evaluator shall confirm by testing that following the operational guidance and performing each action specified in the ST to re-enable the remote administrator’s access results in successful access (when using valid credentials for that administrator).

              ebc79928-efe7-4fbf-93c6-3d25ad2a17c2

              If the time period selection in FIA_AFL.1.2 is included in the ST, then the evaluator shall wait for just less than the time period configured in Test 1 and show that an authorisation attempt using valid credentials does not result in successful access. The evaluator shall then wait until just after the time period configured in Test 1 and show that an authorisation attempt using valid credentials results in successful access.

              FIA_PMG_EXT.1 Password Management

              This component must be included in the ST if the TOE implements any of the following features:
              The TSF shall provide the following password management capabilities for administrative passwords:
              1. Passwords shall be able to be composed of any combination of upper and lower case letters, numbers and the following special characters:

              [selection: "!", "@", "#", "$", "%", "^", "&", "*", "(", ")", [assignment: other characters]]
              1. Minimum password length shall be configurable to between

              [assignment: minimum number of characters supported by the TOE] and [assignment: number of characters greater than or equal to 15]

              characters.

              Application Note:

              Application Note 76

              The ST author selects the special characters that are supported by the TOE. They may optionally list additional special characters supported using the assignment. "Administrative passwords" refers to passwords used by Administrators at the local console, over protocols that support passwords, such as SSH and HTTPS, or to grant configuration data that supports other SFRs in the Security Target.

              The second assignment should be configured with the largest minimum password length the Security Administrator can configure.

              473. The evaluator shall check that the TSS:

              1. lists the supported special character(s) for the composition of administrator passwords.

              2. to ensure that the minimum_password_length parameter is configurable by a Security Administrator.

              3. lists the range of values supported for the minimum_password_length parameter. The listed range shall include the value of 15.

              Guidance

              474. The evaluator shall examine the guidance documentation to determine that it:

              1. identifies the characters that may be used in passwords and provides guidance to security administrators on the composition of strong passwords, and

              2. provides instructions on setting the minimum password length and describes the valid minimum password lengths supported.

              Tests

              475. The evaluator shall perform the following tests.


              • Test FIA_PMG_EXT.1:1:

                Test 1: The evaluator shall compose passwords that meet the requirements in some way. For each password, the evaluator shall verify that the TOE supports the password. While the evaluator is not required (nor is it feasible) to test all possible compositions of passwords, the evaluator shall ensure that all characters, and a minimum length listed in the requirement are supported and justify the subset of those characters chosen for testing.

              • Test FIA_PMG_EXT.1:2:

                Test 2: The evaluator shall compose passwords that do not meet the requirements in some way. For each password, the evaluator shall verify that the TOE does not support the password. While the evaluator is not required (nor is it feasible) to test all possible compositions of passwords, the evaluator shall ensure that the TOE enforces the allowed characters and the minimum length listed in the requirement and justify the subset of those characters chosen for testing.

              FIA_PSK_EXT.1 Pre-Shared Key Composition

              This component must be included in the ST if the TOE implements any of the following features:
              The TSF shall be able to use pre-shared keys that conform to RFC 8784 for IPsec.
              The TSF shall be able to [selection: accept externally generated pre-shared keys, generate 256 bit-based pre-shared keys via FCS_RBG.1].
              Application Note:

              Application Note 77

              Generated PSKs are expected to be shared between components via an out-of-band mechanism.

              The following content should be included if:

              476. If "generate" is selected, the evaluator shall confirm that this process uses the RBG specified in FCS_RBG.1 and the output matches the size required in FIA_PSK_EXT.1.2.

              Guidance

              477. The evaluator shall examine the operational guidance to determine that it provides guidance to administrators on how to configure the mandatory_or_not flag per RFC 8784.

              Tests
              • Test FIA_PSK_EXT.1:1:

                478. The evaluator shall attempt to establish a connection and confirm that the connection requires the selected factors in the PSK to establish the connection in alignment with table 1 from RFC 8784.

              FIA_UAU.7 Protected Authentication Feedback

              This component must be included in the ST if the TOE implements any of the following features:

              The TSF shall provide only obscured feedback to the administrative user while the authentication is in progress at the local console.

              Application Note:

              Application Note 75

              ‘Obscured feedback’ implies the TSF does not produce a visible display of any authentication data entered by an administrator (such as the echoing of a password), although an obscured indication of progress may be provided (such as an asterisk for each character). It also implies that the TSF does not return any information during the authentication process to the administrator that may provide any indication of the authentication data.

              470. None

              Guidance

              471. The evaluator shall examine the guidance documentation to determine that any necessary preparatory steps to ensure authentication data is not revealed while entering for each local login allowed.

              Tests

              472. The evaluator shall perform the following test for each method of local login allowed:

              • Test FIA_UAU.7:1:

                Test 1: The evaluator shall locally authenticate to the TOE. While making this attempt, the evaluator shall verify that at most obscured feedback is provided while entering the authentication information.

              A.3.2 Security Management (FMT)

              FMT_MTD.1/CryptoKeys Management of TSF Data

              This component must be included in the ST if the TOE implements any of the following features:

              The TSF shall restrict the ability to manage the cryptographic keys to Security Administrators.

              Application Note:

              Application Note 83

              FMT_MTD.1.1/CryptoKeys restricts management of cryptographic keys to Security Administrators. It should be included if cryptographic keys can be managed (e.g., modified, deleted or generated/imported) by the Security Administrator. The identifier ‘CryptoKeys’ has been added here to separate this iteration of FMT_MTD.1 from the mandatory iteration of FMT_MTD.1 defined in Section 6.6.2.1 (FMT_MTD.1/CoreData).

              505. For distributed TOEs, see Section 2.4.1.1.

              506. For non-distributed TOEs, the evaluator shall ensure the TSS lists the keys the Security Administrator is able to manage to include the options available (e.g., generating keys, importing keys, modifying keys or deleting keys) and names the operations that are performed.

              Guidance

              507. For distributed TOEs, see Section 2.4.1.2.

              508. For non-distributed TOEs, the evaluator shall also ensure the Guidance Documentation describes how the operations are performed on the keys the Security Administrator is able to manage.

              Tests

              509. The evaluator shall perform the following tests:


              • Test FMT_MTD.1/CryptoKeys:1:

                Test 1: The evaluator shall try to perform at least one of the related actions (modify, delete, generate/import) without prior authentication as Security Administrator (either by authentication as a non-administrative user, if supported, or without authentication at all). Attempts to perform related actions without prior authentication should fail.

                When there is an implementation where other users than the Security Administrator can be defined, the user might not be able to get to the point where the attempt can be executed without user authentication. In that case it shall be demonstrated that access control mechanisms prevent execution up to the step that can be reached without authentication as Security Administrator.

              • Test FMT_MTD.1/CryptoKeys:2:

                Test 2: The evaluator shall try to perform at least one of the related actions with prior authentication as Security Administrator. This attempt should be successful.

              A.3.3 Protection of the TSF (FPT)

              FPT_APW_EXT.1 Protection of Administrator Passwords

              This component must be included in the ST if the TOE implements any of the following features:
              The TSF shall store administrative passwords in non-plaintext form.
              The TSF shall prevent the reading of plaintext administrative passwords.
              Application Note:

              Application Note 78

              The intent of the requirement is that raw password authentication data of Security Administrators is not stored in the clear, and that no Administrator is able to read the plaintext password of a Security Administrator through “normal” interfaces. An all-powerful Administrator could directly read memory to capture a password but is trusted not to do so. Passwords should be obscured during entry on the local console in accordance with FIA_UAU.7.

              Although this is out-of-scope of this cPP, it is strongly advised to protect all authentication data of the device the same way and/or with similar strength as administrative passwords to reduce the risk of attacks like privilege escalation, etc.

              479. The evaluator shall examine the TSS to determine that it details all authentication data that are subject to this requirement, and the method used to obscure the plaintext password data when stored. The TSS shall also detail passwords are stored in such a way that they are unable to be viewed through an interface designed specifically for that purpose, as outlined in the application note.

              Guidance

              480. None

              Tests

              481. None

              A.3.4 TOE Access (FTA)

              FTA_SSL_EXT.1 TSF-initiated Session Locking

              This component must be included in the ST if the TOE implements any of the following features:
              The TSF shall, for local interactive sessions, [selection: lock the session - disable any activity of the Administrator’s data access/display devices other than unlocking the session, and requiring that the Administrator reauthenticate to the TSF prior to unlocking the session, terminate the session] after a Security Administrator-specified time period of inactivity.
              Application Note:

              Application Note 84

              An interactive session governed by this SFR is a session in which an authenticated state is achieved and then preserved across multiple commands. By contrast, if authentication accompanies each individual command (without preservation of the same authenticated state) then this is not considered an interactive session.

              510. The evaluator shall examine the TSS to determine that it details whether local administrative session locking or termination is supported and the related inactivity time period settings.

              Guidance

              511. The evaluator shall confirm that the guidance documentation states whether local administrative session locking or termination is supported and instructions for configuring the inactivity time period.

              Tests

              512. The evaluator shall perform the following test:

              • Test FTA_SSL_EXT.1:1:

                Test 1: The evaluator shall follow the guidance documentation to configure several different values for the inactivity time period referenced in the component. For each period configured, the evaluator shall establish a local interactive session with the TOE. The evaluator shall then verify that the session is either locked or terminated after the configured time period. If locking was selected from the component, the evaluator shall then verify that reauthentication is needed when trying to unlock the session.

              Appendix B - Selection-based Requirements

              As indicated in the introduction to this PP, the baseline requirements (those that must be performed by the TOE or its underlying platform) are contained in the body of this PP. There are additional requirements based on selections in the body of the PP: if certain selections are made, then additional requirements below must be included.

              B.1 Security Audit (FAU)

              FAU_GEN_EXT.1 Security Audit Generation

              The TSF shall be able to generate audit records for each TOE component. The audit records generated by the TSF of each TOE component shall include the subset of security relevant audit events which can occur on the TOE component.

              Application Note:

              Application Note 48

              The TOE must be able to generate audit records for each TOE component. Some TOE components of a distributed TOE might not implement the complete TSF of the overall TOE but only a subset of the TSF. The audit records for each TOE component need to cover all security relevant audit events according to the subset of the TSF implemented by this particular TOE component but not necessarily all security relevant audit events according to the TSF of the overall TOE. If a security-relevant event can occur on multiple TOE components, it needs to cause generation of an audit record uniquely identifying the component associated with the event. The ST author should identify for each TOE component which of the overall required audit events defined in FAU_GEN.1.1 are logged. The ST author may decide to do this by providing a corresponding table. The information provided needs to be in agreement with Table 1. The overall TOE needs to cover all auditable events listed in Table 2 (and Table 10, Table 11, the claimed PP-Module(s), and the claimed functional package(s) as applicable to the overall TOE).

              306. For distributed TOEs, the requirements on TSS, Guidance Documentation and Tests regarding FAU_GEN_EXT.1 are already covered by the corresponding requirements for FAU_GEN.1.

              Guidance
              There are no additional Guidance evaluation activities for this component.
              Tests
              There are no test activities for this component.

              FAU_SAR.1 Audit Review

              The inclusion of this selection-based component depends upon selection in:

              This component must be included in the ST if any of the following SFRs are included:

              The TSF shall provide the Security Administrator with the capability to read all audited events and record contents from the audit data

              The TSF shall provide the audit data in a manner suitable for the Security Administrator to interpret the information.

              303. There are no TSS evaluation activities for this component.

              Guidance

              304. The evaluator shall review the AGD for the procedure on how to review the audit records.

              Tests

              305. The evaluator shall verify that the audit records provide all of the information specified in FAU_GEN.1 and that this information is suitable for human interpretation. The evaluation activity for this requirement is performed in conjunction with the evaluation activity for FAU_GEN.1.

              FAU_STG_EXT.4 Protected Local Audit Event Storage for Distributed TOEs

              The TSF of each TOE component which stores security audit data locally shall perform the following actions when the local storage space for audit data is full: [assignment: table of components and for each component its action chosen according to the following:] [selection: drop new audit data, overwrite previous audit records according to the following rule: [assignment: rule for overwriting previous audit records], [assignment: other action]].
              Application Note:

              Application Note 49

              If a component of a distributed TOE collects data from other components and then forwards it to another component or external IT entity (reference FAU_STG_EXT.1.1) then the operations in this SFR must be performed in a way to cover the storage space action(s) for all of the audit data that the TOE collects (i.e., not just for the data generated by the collecting component for itself).

              It is acceptable for a TOE component to store audit information in multiple places (e.g., for redundancy), whether locally in the TOE component itself and in another TOE component, or in more than one other TOE component.

              TOE components are not required to monitor or audit connectivity or network outages between TOE components. This aspect is covered by the assumption A.COMPONENTS_RUNNING

              307. The evaluator shall examine the TSS to confirm that it describes which TOE components store their security audit events locally and which send their security audit events to other TOE components for local storage. For the latter, the target TOE component(s) which store security audit events for other TOE components shall be identified. For every sending TOE component, the corresponding receiving TOE component(s) need to be identified. For every transfer of audit information between TOE components it shall be described how the data is secured during transfer according to FTP_ITC.1 or FPT_ITT.1.

              For each TOE component which does not store audit events locally by itself, the evaluator shall confirm that the TSS describes how the audit information is buffered before sending to another TOE component for local storage.

              Guidance

              309. The evaluator shall examine the guidance documentation to ensure that it describes how the link between different TOE components is established if audit data is exchanged between TOE components for local storage. The guidance documentation shall describe all possible configuration options for local storage of audit data and provide all instructions how to perform the related configuration of the TOE components.

              310. The evaluator shall also ensure that the guidance documentation describes for every TOE component which does not store audit information locally how audit information is buffered before transmission to other TOE components.

              Tests

              311. For at least one of each type of distributed TOE components (sensors, central nodes, etc.), the following tests shall be performed using distributed TOEs.



              312. While performing these tests, the evaluator shall verify that the TOE behaviour observed during testing is consistent with the descriptions provided in the TSS and the Guidance Documentation. Depending on the TOE configuration, there might be a large number of different possible configurations. In such cases, it is acceptable to perform subset testing, accompanied by an equivalency argument describing the evaluator’s sampling methodology.

              • Test FAU_STG_EXT.4:1:

                Test 1: For each type of TOE component, the evaluator shall perform a representative subset of auditable actions and ensure that these actions cause the generation of appropriately formed audit records. Generation of such records can be observed directly on the distributed TOE component (if there is an appropriate interface), or indirectly after transmission to a central audit log storage location.

              • Test FAU_STG_EXT.4:2:

                Test 2: For each type of TOE component that, in the evaluated configuration, is capable of transmitting audit information to the external audit server (as specified in FTP_ITC.1), the evaluator shall configure a trusted channel and confirm that audit records generated as a result of actions taken by the evaluator are securely transmitted to the external audit server. It is sufficient to observe negotiation and establishment of the secure channel with the TOE component and the subsequent transmission of encrypted data to confirm this functionality. Alternatively, the following steps shall be performed: The evaluator shall induce audit record transmission, then review the packet capture around the time of transmission and verify that no audit data has been transmitted in the clear.

              • Test FAU_STG_EXT.4:3:

                Test 3: For each type of TOE component that, in the evaluated configuration, is capable of transmitting audit information to another TOE component (as specified in FTP_ITT.1 or FTP_ITC.1, respectively), the evaluator shall configure a secure channel and confirm that audit records generated as a result of actions taken by the evaluator have been securely transmitted. It is sufficient to observe negotiation and establishment of the secure channel with the TOE component and the subsequent transmission of encrypted data to confirm this functionality. Alternatively, the following steps shall be performed: The evaluator shall induce audit record transmission, then review the packet capture around the time of transmission and verify that no audit data is transmitted in the clear.

              FAU_STG_EXT.5 Protected Remote Audit Event Storage for Distributed TOEs

              Each TOE component which does not store security audit data locally shall be able to buffer security audit data locally until it has been transferred to another TOE component that stores or forwards it. All transfer of audit records between TOE components shall use a protected channel according to [selection: FPT_ITT.1, FTP_ITC.1].
              Application Note:

              Application Note 50

              If a component of a distributed TOE collects data from other components and then forwards it to another component or external IT entity (cf. FAU_STG_EXT.1.1) then the operations in this SFR must be performed in a way to cover the storage space action(s) for all of the audit data that the TOE collects (i.e. not just for the data generated by the collecting component for itself).

              It is acceptable for a TOE component to store audit information in multiple places (e.g., for redundancy), whether locally in the TOE component itself and in another TOE component, or in more than one other TOE component.

              TOE components are not required to monitor or audit connectivity or network outages between TOE components. This aspect is covered by the assumption A.COMPONENTS_RUNNING.

              Something
              ABC
              Guidance
              There are no additional Guidance evaluation activities for this component.
              Tests
              There are no test activities for this component.

              B.2 Cryptographic Support (FCS)

              FCS_COP.1/AEAD Cryptographic Operation - Authenticated Encryption with Associated Data

              The inclusion of this selection-based component depends upon selection in:

              This component must be included in the ST if any of the following SFRs are included:

              The TSF shall perform authenticated encryption with associated data in accordance with a specified cryptographic algorithm

              [selection: Cryptographic algorithm] and cryptographic key sizes [selection: Cryptographic key sizes] that meet the following: [selection: List of standards] .

              the following table provides the allowed choices for completion of the selection operations of FCS_COP.1/AEAD.
              Table 10: Allowed choices for FCS_COP.1/AEAD
              Identifier Cryptographic algorithm Cryptographic key sizes List of standards
              AES-CCMAES in CCM mode with unpredictable, non-repeating nonce, minimum size of 64 bits[selection: 128, 256] bits[selection: ISO/IEC 18033-3:2010 (Subclause 5.2), FIPS PUB 197] [AES]

              [selection: ISO/IEC 19772:2020 (Clause 7), NIST SP 800-38C] [CCM]
              AES-GCMAES in GCM mode with non-repeating IVs using [selection: deterministic, RBG-based],IV construction; the tag must be of length [selection: 96, 104, 112, 120, 128] bits.[selection: 128, 256] bits[selection: ISO/IEC 18033-3:2010 (Subclause 5.2), FIPS PUB 197] [AES]

              [selection: ISO/IEC 19772:2020 (Clause 10), NIST SP 800-38D] [GCM]
              Application Note:

              Application Note 51

              The ST author should choose the cryptographic algorithms in which AES operates, parameters, and standards implemented to perform symmetric-key authenticated encryption/decryption.

              313. The evaluator shall examine the TSS to ensure that it describes the construction of any IVs, nonces, and tags in conformance with the relevant specifications.

              314. If a CCM mode algorithm is selected, then the evaluator shall examine the TOE summary specification to confirm that it describes how the nonce is generated and that the same nonce is never reused to encrypt different plaintext pairs under the same key.

              315. If a GCM mode algorithm is selected, then the evaluator shall examine the TOE summary specification to confirm that it describes how the IV is generated and that the same IV is never reused to encrypt different plaintext pairs under the same key. The evaluator shall also confirm that for each invocation of GCM, the length of the plaintext is at most (232)-2 blocks

              Guidance

              316. There are no additional Guidance evaluation activities for this component.

              Tests

              317. The following tests may require the developer to provide access to a test platform that provides the evaluator with tools that are typically not found on factory products.

              318. The following tests are conditional based upon the selections made in the SFR. The evaluator shall perform the following test or witness respective tests executed by the developer. The tests must be executed on a platform that is as close as practically possible to the operational platform (but which may be instrumented in terms of, for example, use of a debug mode). Where the test is not carried out on the TOE itself, the test platform shall be identified and the differences between test environment and TOE execution environment shall be described.


              • Test FCS_COP.1/AEAD:1:

                AES-CCM

                319. To test the TOE’s implementation of AES-CCM authenticated encryption functionality the evaluator shall perform the Algorithm Functional Tests described below using the following input parameters:

                • Key Size [128, 256] bits

                • Associated data size [0-65536] bits in increments of 8

                • Payload size [0-256] bits in increments of 8

                • IV/Nonce size [64-104] bits in increments of 8

                • Tag size [32-128] bits in increments of 16

                Algorithm Functional Test

                320. Unless otherwise specified, the following tests should use random data, a tag size of 128 bits, IV/Nonce size of 104 bits, payload size of 256 bits, and associated data size of 256 bits. If any of these values are not supported, any supported value may be used. The evaluator shall compare the output from each test case against results generated by a known-good implementation with the same input parameters.

                Variable Associated Data Test

                321. For each claimed key size, and for each supported associated data size from 0 through 256 bits in increments of 8 bits, the TOE must be tested by encrypting 10 test cases using all random data. In addition, for each key size, the TOE must be tested by encrypting 10 cases with associated data lengths of 65536 bits, if supported.

                Variable Payload Test

                322. For each claimed key size, and for each supported payload size from 0 through 256 bits in increments of 8 bits, the TOE must be tested by encrypting 10 test cases using all random data.

                Variable Tag Test

                323. For each claimed key size, and for each supported tag size from 32 through 128 bits in increments of 16 bits, the TOE must be tested by encrypting 10 test cases using all random data.

                Decryption Verification Test

                324. For each claimed key size, for each supported associated data size from 0 through 256 bits in increments of 8 bits, for each supported payload size from 0 through 256 bits in increments of 8 bits, for each supported IV/Nonce size from 64 through 104 bits in increments of 8 bits, and for each supported tag size from 32 through 128 bits in increments of 16 bits, the TOE must be tested by decrypting 10 test cases using all random data.

                • Test FCS_COP.1/AEAD:2:

                  AES-GCM

                  325. To test the TOE’s implementation of AES-GCM authenticated encryption functionality the evaluator shall perform the Encryption Algorithm Functional Tests and Decryption Algorithm Functional Tests as described below using the following input parameters:

                  • Key Size [128, 256] bits

                  • Associated data size [0-65536] bits

                  • Payload size [0-65536] bits

                  • IV size [96] bits

                  • Tag size [96, 104, 112, 120, 128] bits

                  Encryption Algorithm Functional Tests

                  326. The evaluator shall generate 15 test cases using random data for each combination of the above parameters as follows:

                  • Each claimed key size,

                  • Each supported tag size,

                  • Four supported non-zero payload sizes, such that two are multiples of 128 bits and two are not multiples of 128 bits,

                  • Four supported non-zero associated data sizes, such that two are multiples of 128 bits and two are not multiples of 128 bits, and

                  • An associated data size of zero, if supported.

                  327. Note that the IV size is always 96 bits.

                  328. The evaluator shall compare the output from each test case against results generated by a known- good implementation with the same input parameters.

                  Decryption Algorithm Functional Tests

                  329. The evaluator shall test the authenticated decrypt functionality of AES-GCM by supplying 15 test cases for the supported combinations of the parameters as described above. For each parameter combination the evaluator shall introduce an error into either the Ciphertext or the Tag such that approximately half of the cases are correct and half the cases contain errors.

                  FCS_COP.1/CMAC Cryptographic Operation - CMAC

                  The inclusion of this selection-based component depends upon selection in:

                  This component must be included in the ST if any of the following SFRs are included:

                  The TSF shall perform CMAC in accordance with a specified cryptographic algorithm AES using CMAC mode and cryptographic key sizes 128 bits that meet the following:

                  [selection: ISO/IEC 9797-1:2011 subclause 7.6 (CMAC) and ISO/IEC 18033-3:2010 subclause 5.2 (AES), NIST SP 800-38B (CMAC) and NIST FIPS 197 (AES)].

                  376. The evaluator shall examine the TSS to determine that it specifies the cryptographic algorithm and 128 bit key size supported by the TOE for CMAC.

                  Guidance

                  377. There are no additional Guidance evaluation activities for this component.

                  Tests

                  • Test FCS_COP.1/CMAC:1:

                    CMAC Generation Test

                    378. To test the generation capability of AES-CMAC, the evaluator shall provide to the TSF, for each key length-message length-CMAC length tuple (in bytes), a set of eight arbitrary key-plaintext tuples that will result in the generation of a known MAC value when encrypted. The evaluator shall then verify that the correct MAC was generated in each case.

                  • Test FCS_COP.1/CMAC:2:

                    CMAC Verification Test

                    379. To test the verification capability of AES-CMAC, the evaluator shall provide to the TSF, for each key length-message length-CMAC length tuple (in bytes), a set of 20 arbitrary key-MAC tuples that will result in the generation of known messages when verified. The evaluator shall then verify that the correct message was generated in each case.

                    380. The following information should be used by the evaluator to determine the key length-message length-CMAC length tuples that should be tested:

                    Key length: Values will include the following:

                    • 16

                    Message length: Values will include the following:

                    • 0 (optional)

                    • Largest value supported by the implementation (no greater than 65536)

                    • Two values divisible by 16

                    • Two values not divisible by 16

                    CMAC length: Smallest value supported by the implementation (no less than 1)

                    381. 16 Any supported CMAC length between the minimum and maximum values

                  FCS_COP.1/KeyEncap Cryptographic Operation - Key Encapsulation

                  The inclusion of this selection-based component depends upon selection in:

                  This component must be included in the ST if any of the following SFRs are included:

                  The TSF shall perform key encapsulation in accordance with a specified cryptographic algorithm

                  [selection: Cryptographic Algorithm] and cryptographic key sizes [selection: Cryptographic Key Sizes] that meet the following: [selection: List of Standards] . The following table provides the allowed choices for completion of the selection operations of FCS_COP.1/KeyEncap.
                  Table 11: Allowed choices for FCS_COP.1/KeyEncap
                  Identifier Cryptographic Algorithm Cryptographic Key Sizes List of Standards
                  ML-KEMML-KEMParameter set = ML-KEM-1024NIST FIPS 203
                  Application Note:

                  Application Note 52

                  The only anticipated use of key encapsulation is the use of ML-KEM as part of key establishment for trusted communication.

                  330. The evaluator shall ensure that the TSS documents that the selection of the key size is sufficient for the security strength of the key encapsulated.

                  331. The evaluator shall examine the TSS to verify that any one-time values such as nonces or masks are constructed and used in accordance with the relevant standards.

                  Guidance

                  332. There are no additional Guidance evaluation activities for this component.

                  Tests

                  333. The following tests may require the developer to provide access to a test platform that provides the evaluator with tools that are typically not found on factory products.

                  334. The following tests are conditional based upon the selections made in the SFR. The evaluator shall perform the following test or witness respective tests executed by the developer. The tests must be executed on a platform that is as close as practically possible to the operational platform (but which may be instrumented in terms of, for example, use of a debug mode). Where the test is not carried out on the TOE itself, the test platform shall be identified and the differences between test environment and TOE execution environment shall be described.

                  • Test FCS_COP.1/KeyEncap:1:

                    ML-KEM Key Encapsulation

                    335. To test the TOE’s implementation of ML-KEM key encapsulation/decapsulation, the evaluator shall perform the Encapsulation Test and the Decapsulation Test using the following input parameters:

                    • Encapsulation Parameters:

                      • Parameter set [ML-KEM-1024]

                      • Previously generated encapsulation key (ek)

                      • Random value (m) [32 bytes]

                    • Decapsulation Parameters:

                      • Parameter set [ML-KEM-1024]

                      • Previously generated decapsulation key (dk)

                      • Previously generated ciphertext (c) [32 bytes]

                    Encapsulation Test

                    336. For each supported parameter set the evaluator shall generate 25 test cases consisting of an encapsulation key ek and random value m. For each test case the valuator shall require the implementation under test to generate the corresponding shared secret k and ciphertext c. To determine correctness, the evaluator shall compare the resulting values with those generated using a known-good implementation using the same inputs.

                    Encapsulation Key Check (if supported)

                    337. The evaluator shall generate 10 encapsulation keys such that:

                    • Five of the encapsulation keys are valid, and

                    • Five of the encapsulation keys are modified such that a value in the noisy linear system is encoded into the key as a value greater than Q.

                    338. The evaluator shall invoke the TOE’s Encapsulation Key Check functionality to determine the validity of the 10 keys. The unmodified keys should be determined valid, and the modified keys should be determined invalid.

                    Decapsulation Key Check (if supported)

                    339. The evaluator shall generate 10 decapsulation keys such that:

                    • Five of the decapsulation keys are valid, and

                    • Five of the decapsulation keys are modified such that the concatenated values ek||H(ek) will no longer match by modifying H(ek) to be a different value.

                    340. The evaluator shall invoke the TOE’s Decapsulation Key Check functionality to determine the validity of the 10 keys. The unmodified keys should be determined valid, and the modified keys should be determined invalid.

                    Decapsulation Test

                    341. For each supported parameter set the evaluator shall use a single previously generated decapsulation key dk and generate 10 test cases consisting of valid and invalid ciphertexts c. For each test case the evaluator shall require the implementation under test to generate the corresponding shared secret k whether or not the ciphertext is valid. To determine correctness, the evaluator shall compare the resulting values with those generated using a known-good implementation using the same inputs.

                    FCS_COP.1/KeyWrap Cryptographic Operation - Key Wrapping

                    The inclusion of this selection-based component depends upon selection in:

                    This component must be included in the ST if any of the following SFRs are included:

                    The TSF shall perform key wrapping in accordance with a specified cryptographic algorithm

                    [selection: Cryptographic Algorithm] and cryptographic key sizes [selection: Cryptographic Key Sizes] that meet the following: [selection: List of Standards] .

                    The following table provides the allowed choices for completion of the selection operations of FCS_COP.1/KeyWrap.
                    Table 12: Allowed choices for FCS_COP.1/KeyWrap
                    Identifier Cryptographic Algorithm Cryptographic Key Sizes List of Standards
                    AES-KWAES in KW mode256 bits[selection: ISO/IEC 18033-3:2010 (Subclause 5.2), FIPS PUB 197] [AES]

                    [selection: ISO/IEC 19772:2020 (clause 6), NIST SP 800-38F (Section 6.2)] [KW mode]
                    AES-KWPAES in KWP mode256 bits[selection: ISO/IEC 18033-3:2010 (Subclause 5.2), FIPS PUB 197] [AES]

                    NIST SP 800-38F (Section 6.3) [KWP mode]
                    AES-CCMAES in CCM mode with unpredictable, non-repeating nonce, minimum size of 64 bits256 bits[selection: ISO/IEC 18033-3:2010 (Subclause 5.2), FIPS PUB 197] [AES]

                    [selection: ISO/IEC 19772:2020 (Clause 7), NIST SP 800-38C] [CCM]
                    AES-GCMAES in GCM mode with non-repeating IVs using [selection: deterministic, RBG-based],IV construction; the tag must be of length [selection: 96, 104, 112, 120, 128] bits.256 bits[selection: ISO/IEC 18033-3:2010 (Subclause 5.2), FIPS PUB 197] [AES]

                    [selection: ISO/IEC 19772:2020 (Clause 10), NIST SP 800-38D] [GCM]
                    Application Note:

                    Application Note 53

                    NIST SP 800-57 Part 1 Revision 5, Section 5.6.2 specifies that the size of key used to protect the key being transported should be at least the security strength of the key it is protecting.

                    342. The evaluator shall ensure that the TSS documents that the selection of the key size is sufficient for the security strength of the key wrapped.

                    343. The evaluator shall examine the TSS to ensure that it describes the construction of any IVs, nonces, and MACs in conformance with the relevant specifications.

                    Guidance

                    344. There are no additional Guidance evaluation activities for this component.

                    Tests

                    345. For tests of AES-GCM and AES-CCM, see testing for FCS_COP.1/AEAD.

                    346. The following tests are conditional based upon the selections made in the SFR. The evaluator shall perform the following test or witness respective tests executed by the developer. The tests must be executed on a platform that is as close as practically possible to the operational platform (but which may be instrumented in terms of, for example, use of a debug mode). Where the test is not carried out on the TOE itself, the test platform shall be identified and the differences between test environment and TOE execution environment shall be described.


                    • Test FCS_COP.1/KeyWrap:1:

                      AES-KW

                      347. To test the TOE’s ability to wrap keys using AES in Key Wrap mode the evaluator shall perform the Algorithm Functional Tests using the following input parameters:

                      • Key size [256] bits

                      • Keyword cipher type [cipher, inverse]

                      • Payload sizes [128-4096] bits by 64s

                      Algorithm Functional Test

                      348. The evaluator shall generate 100 encryption test cases using random data for each combination of claimed key size, keyword cipher type, and six supported payload sizes such that the payload sizes include the minimum, the maximum, two that are divisible by 128, and two that are not divisible by 128.

                      349. The results shall be compared with those generated by a known-good implementation using the same inputs.

                      350. The evaluator shall generate 100 decryption test cases using the same parameters as above, but with 20 of each 100 test cases having modified ciphertext to produce an incorrect result. To determine correctness, the evaluator shall confirm that the results correspond as expected for both the modified and unmodified values.

                    • Test FCS_COP.1/KeyWrap:2:

                      AES-KWP

                      351. To test the TOE’s ability to wrap keys using AES in Key Wrap with Padding mode with padding the evaluator shall perform the Algorithm Functional Tests using the following input parameters:

                      • Key size [256] bits

                      • Keyword cipher type [cipher, inverse]

                      • Payload sizes [8-4096] bits by 8s

                      Algorithm Functional Test

                      352. The evaluator shall generate 100 encryption test cases using random data for each combination of claimed key size, keyword cipher type, and six supported payload sizes such that the payload sizes include the minimum, the maximum, two that are divisible by 128, and two that are not divisible by 128.

                      353. The results shall be compared with those generated by a known-good implementation using the same inputs.

                      354. The evaluator shall generate 100 decryption test cases using the same parameters as above, but with 20 of each 100 test cases having modified ciphertext to produce an incorrect result. To determine correctness, the evaluator shall confirm that the results correspond as expected for both the modified and unmodified values.

                    FCS_COP.1/SKC Cryptographic Operation - Symmetric Key Cryptography

                    The inclusion of this selection-based component depends upon selection in:

                    This component must be included in the ST if any of the following SFRs are included:

                    The TSF shall perform symmetric-key encryption/decryption in accordance with a specified cryptographic algorithm

                    [selection: Cryptographic Algorithm] and cryptographic key sizes [selection: Cryptographic Key Sizes] that meet the following: [selection: List of Standards] .

                    The following table provides the allowed choices for completion of the selection operations of FCS_COP.1/SKC.
                    Table 13: Allowed choices for FCS_COP.1/SKC
                    Identifier Cryptographic Algorithm Cryptographic Key Sizes List of Standards
                    AES-CBCAES in CBC mode with non-repeating and unpredictable IVs [selection: 128, 256] [selection: ISO/IEC 18033-3:2010 (Subclause 5.2), FIPS PUB 197] [AES]

                    [selection: ISO/IEC 10116:2017 (Clause 7), NIST SP 800-38A] [CBC]
                    XTS-AESAES in XTS mode with unique tweak values that are consecutive non-negative integers starting at an arbitrary non-negative integer [selection: 256, 512] [selection: ISO/IEC 18033-3:2010 (Subclause 5.2), FIPS PUB 197] [AES]

                    [selection: IEEE Std. 1619-2018, NIST SP 800-38E] [XTS]
                    AES-CTRAES in Counter Mode with a non-repeating initial counter and with no repeated use of counter values across multiple messages with the same secret key [selection: 128, 256] [selection: ISO/IEC 18033-3:2010 (Subclause 5.2), FIPS PUB 197] [AES]

                    [selection: : ISO/IEC 10116:2017 (Clause 10), NIST SP 800-38A] [CTR]
                    Application Note:

                    Application Note 54

                    The ST author should choose the cryptographic algorithms in which AES operates, parameters, and standards implemented to perform symmetric-key encryption/decryption without built-in authentication.

                    355. The evaluator shall examine the TSS to ensure that it describes the construction of any IVs, tweak values, and counters in conformance with the relevant specifications.

                    356. If XTS-AES is claimed then the evaluator shall examine the TSS to verify that the TOE creates full-length keys by methods that ensure that the two key halves are different and independent.

                    357. The evaluator shall examine the TSS to ensure it identifies the key size(s) and mode(s) supported by the TOE for data AES encryption/decryption.

                    Guidance

                    358. The evaluator shall verify that the AGD guidance instructs the administrator on how to configure the TOE to use the selected mode(s) and key size(s) for AES encryption/decryption.

                    Tests



                    • Test FCS_COP.1/SKC:1:

                      AES-CBC

                      359. To test the TOE’s ability to encrypt/decrypt data using AES in CBC mode, the evaluator shall perform Algorithm Functional Tests and Monte Carlo Tests using the following input parameters:

                      • Key size [128, 256] bits

                      • Direction [encryption, decryption]

                      Algorithm Functional Test

                      360. Algorithm Functional Tests are designed to verify the correct operation of the logical components of the algorithm implementation under normal operation using different block sizes. For AES-CBC, there are two types of AFTs:

                      Known-Answer Tests

                      361. For each combination of direction and claimed key size, the TOE must be tested using the GFSBox, KeySbox, VarTxt, and VarKey test cases listed in Appendixes B through E of The Advanced Encryption Standard Algorithm Validation Suite (AESAVS), NIST, 15 November 2002.

                      Multi-Block Message Tests

                      362. For each combination of direction and claimed key size, the TOE must be tested against 10 test cases consisting of a random IV, random key, and random plaintext/ciphertext. The plaintext/ciphertext starts with a length of 16 bytes and increases by 16 bytes for each test case until reaching 160 bytes.

                        Monte Carlo Tests

                        363. Monte Carlo tests are intended to test the implementation under strenuous conditions. The TOE must process the test cases according to the following algorithm once for each combination of direction and key size:

                        Key[0] = Key 
                        IV[0] = IV 
                        PT[0] = PT 
                        for i = 0 to 99 { 
                                Output Key[i], IV[i], PT[0] 
                                for j = 0 to 999 { 
                                          if (j == 0) { 
                                                     CT[j] = AES-CBC-Encrypt(Key[i], IV[i], PT[j]) 
                                                     PT[j+1] = IV[i] 
                                          } else { 
                                                     CT[j] = AES-CBC-Encrypt(Key[i], PT[j]) 
                                                     PT[j+1] = CT[j-1] 
                                          } 
                                 } 
                                 Output CT[j] 
                                 AES_KEY_SHUFFLE(Key, CT) 
                                 IV[i+1] = CT[j] 
                                 PT[0] = CT[j-1] 
                        } 
                        where AES_KEY_SHUFFLE is defined as: 
                        If ( keylen = 128 ) 
                                  Key[i+1] = Key[i] xor MSB(CT[j], 128) 
                        If ( keylen = 192 ) 
                                  Key[i+1] = Key[i] xor (LSB(CT[j-1], 64) || MSB(CT[j], 128)) 
                        If ( keylen = 256 ) 
                                  Key[i+1] = Key[i] xor (MSB(CT[j-1], 128) || MSB(CT[j], 128)) 

                        The above pseudocode is for encryption. For decryption, swap all instances of CT and PT.

                        The initial IV, key, and plaintext/ciphertext should be random.

                        The evaluator shall test the decrypt functionality using the same test as above, exchanging CT and PT, and replacing AES-CBC-Encrypt with AES-CBC-Decrypt.

                        • Test FCS_COP.1/SKC:2:

                          XTS-AES

                          364. To test the TOE’s ability to encrypt/decrypt data using AES in XTS mode, the evaluator shall perform the Single Data Unit Test and the Multiple Data Unit Test using the following input parameters:

                          o Direction [encryption, decryption]

                          o Key size [512] bits

                          o Tweak value format [128-bit hex string, data unit sequence number]

                          Single Data Unit Test

                          365. For each combination of claimed key size, direction, and supported tweak value format, the evaluator shall generate 50 test cases consisting of random payload data. The payload data size is determined randomly for each test case from supported values within the range [128-65536] bits. The payload size and data unit size must be equal.

                          Multiple Data Unit Test

                          366. For each combination of claimed key size, direction, and supported tweak value format, the evaluator shall generate 50 test cases consisting of random payload data. The payload data size is determined randomly for each test case from supported values within the range [128-65536] bits. Likewise, the data unit size is determined randomly for each test case from supported values within the range [128-65535] bits. The payload size and data unit size must not be equal.

                          367. The evaluator shall verify the correctness of the TSF’s implementation by comparing values generated by the TSF with those generated by a known good implementation using the same input parameters.

                          • Test FCS_COP.1/SKC:3:

                            AES-CTR

                            368. To test the TOE’s ability to encrypt/decrypt data using AES in CTR mode, the evaluator shall perform the Algorithm Functional Test and the Counter Test using the following input parameters:

                            • Direction [encryption, decryption]

                            • Key size [128, 256] bits

                            Algorithm Functional Tests

                            369. Algorithm Functional Tests are designed to verify the correct operation of the logical components of the algorithm implementation under normal operation using different block sizes. For AES-CTR, there are three types of AFTs:

                            Known-Answer Tests

                            370. For each combination of direction and claimed key size, the TOE must be tested using the GFSBox, KeySbox, VarTxt, and VarKey test cases listed in Appendixes B through E of The Advanced Encryption Standard Algorithm Validation Suite (AESAVS), NIST, 15 November 2002.

                            Single Block Message Tests

                            371. For each combination of direction and claimed key, the evaluator shall generate 10 test cases with a data size of 128 bits.

                            Partial Block Message Tests

                            372. Monte Carlo tests are intended to test the implementation under strenuous conditions. The TOE must process the test cases according to the following algorithm once for each combination of direction and key size:

                            373. For each combination of direction and claimed key, the evaluator shall generate five test cases such that the data size is not a multiple of 128 bits.

                            374. The evaluator shall verify the correctness of the TSF’s implementation by comparing values generated by the TSF with those generated by a known good implementation using the same input parameters.

                              Counter Test

                              375. The evaluator shall generate a single message of 1000 blocks (128000 bits) and either encrypt or decrypt it. Back-compute the IVs used. Verify that they are unique and increasing (encryption) or decreasing (decryption).

                              FCS_COP.1/XOF Cryptographic Operation - Extendable-Output Function

                              This component must be included in the ST if any of the following SFRs are included:

                              The TSF shall perform extendable-output function in accordance with a specified cryptographic algorithm

                              [selection: Cryptographic Algorithm] and [selection: Parameters] that meet the following: [selection: List of Standards] . The following table provides the allowed choices for completion of the selection operations of FCS_COP.1.1/XOF.
                              Table 14: Allowed choices for FCS_COP.1.1/XOF
                              Cryptographic Algorithm Parameters List of Standards
                              SHAKEFunctions = [SHAKE128, SHAKE256]NIST FIPS PUB 202 (Section 6.2)
                              Application Note:

                              Since LMS and XMSS use both SHAKE128 and SHAKE256 internally, claiming and testing of both Functions is mandatory

                              397. There are no additional TSS evaluation activities for this component.

                              Guidance

                              398. There are no additional Guidance evaluation activities for this component.

                              Tests

                              399. To test SHAKE-128 or SHAKE-256 the evaluator shall collect the input sizes allowed by the implementation, [0-65536] and the output sizes allowed by the implementation, [16-65536] and compare the results against a known good implementation.

                              400. For the variable length inputs, the evaluator shall test the following:

                              1. Every message length up to the rate (1600 – 2*{128, 256})

                              2. About 100 random message lengths greater than the rate

                              3. All have an output length of {128, 256}

                              401. For variable length outputs, the evaluator shall test the following:

                              1. Minimum output length,

                              2. Maximum output length,

                              3. 510 other random output lengths (for a total of 512 tests)

                              4. All have an input length of {128, 256}

                              FCS_IPSEC_EXT.1 IPsec Protocol

                              This component must be included in the ST if any of the following SFRs are included:
                              The TSF shall implement the IPsec architecture as specified in RFC 4301.
                              Application Note:

                              Application Note 60

                              RFC 4301 calls for an IPsec implementation to protect IP traffic through the use of a Security Policy Database (SPD). The SPD is used to define how IP packets are to be handled: PROTECT the packet (e.g., encrypt the packet), BYPASS the IPsec services (e.g., no encryption), or DISCARD the packet (e.g., drop the packet). The SPD can be implemented in various ways, including router access control lists, firewall rulesets, a ‘traditional’ SPD, etc. Regardless of the implementation details, there is a notion of a ‘rule’ that a packet is ‘matched’ against and a resulting action that takes place.

                              While there must be a means to order the rules, a general approach to ordering is not mandated, as long as the SPD can distinguish the IP packets and apply the rules accordingly. There may be multiple SPDs (one for each network interface), but this is not required.

                              The TSF shall have a nominal, final entry in the SPD that matches anything that is otherwise unmatched and discards it.
                              The TSF shall implement [selection: tunnel mode, transport mode].
                              Application Note:

                              Application Note 61

                              The ST author selects the supported modes of operation for IPsec.

                              The TSF shall implement the IPsec protocol ESP as defined by RFC 4303 using the cryptographic algorithms [selection: AES-CBC-128 (RFC 3602), AES-CBC-192 (RFC 3602), AES-CBC-256 (RFC 3602), AES-GCM-128 (RFC 4106), AES-GCM-192 (RFC 4106), AES-GCM-256 (RFC 4106)] together with a Secure Hash Algorithm (SHA)-based HMAC [selection: HMAC-SHA-256, HMAC-SHA-384, HMAC-SHA-512, no HMAC algorithm].
                              Application Note:

                              Application Note 62

                              When an AES-CBC algorithm is selected, at least one SHA-based HMAC must also be chosen. If only an AES-GCM algorithm is selected, then a SHA-based HMAC is not required since AES-GCM satisfies both confidentiality and integrity functions. IPsec may utilise a truncated version of the SHA-based HMAC functions contained in the selections. Where a truncated output is utilised, it should be highlighted in the TSS.

                              The TSF shall implement the protocol: [selection:
                              • IKEv1, using Main Mode for Phase 1 exchanges, as defined in RFCs 2407, 2408, 2409, RFC 4109, [selection: no other RFCs for extended sequence numbers, RFC 4304 for extended sequence numbers],and [selection: no other RFCs for hash functions, RFC 4868 for hash functions]
                              • IKEv2 as defined in RFC 7296 [selection: with no support for NAT traversal, with mandatory support for NAT traversal as specified in RFC 7296 (Section 2.23)],and [selection: no other RFCs for hash functions, RFC 4868 for hash functions]
                              ].
                              Application Note:

                              Application Note 63

                              If the TOE implements SHA-2 hash algorithms for IKEv1 or IKEv2, the ST author selects RFC 4868. If the TOE implements the use of truncated SHA-based HMACs as described in RFC 4868, they should be highlighted in the TSS.

                              The TSF shall ensure the encrypted payload in the [selection: IKEv1, IKEv2] protocol uses the cryptographic algorithms [selection: AES-CBC-128, AES-CBC-192, AES-CBC-256 (specified in RFC 3602), AES-GCM-128, AES-GCM-192, AES-GCM-256 (specified in RFC 5282)].
                              Application Note:

                              Application Note 64

                              AES-GCM-128, AES-GCM-192 and AES-GCM-256 may only be selected if IKEv2 is also selected, as there is no RFC defining AES-GCM for IKEv1.

                              The TSF shall ensure that [selection:
                              • IKEv1 Phase 1 SA lifetimes can be configured by a Security Administrator based on [selection: number of bytes, length of time, where the time values can be configured between [assignment: minimum configurable rekey time] and [assignment: maximum configurable rekey time]]
                              • IKEv2 SA lifetimes can be configured by a Security Administrator based on [selection: number of bytes, length of time, where the time values can be configured between [assignment: minimum configurable rekey time] and [assignment: maximum configurable rekey time]]
                              ].
                              Application Note:

                              Application Note 65

                              The ST author chooses either the IKEv1 requirements or IKEv2 requirements (or both, depending on the selection in FCS_IPSEC_EXT.1.5). The ST author chooses either volume-based lifetimes or time-based lifetimes (or a combination). The range between the minimum and maximum rekeys time must include a rekey time that causes a rekey to occur at or slightly before 24 hours. The exact values supported may vary by TOE implementation. Some TOEs might require the administrators to ensure rekeying prior to the desired time (e.g., configure a time value of 23h 59min to ensure the actual rekey is performed no later than 24h), while other TOEs might automatically ensure rekeying is performed prior to the configured time.

                              This requirement must be accomplished by providing Security Administrator-configurable lifetimes. Hardcoded limits do not meet this requirement.

                              The TSF shall ensure that [selection:
                              • IKEv1 Phase 2 SA lifetimes can be configured by a Security Administrator based on [selection: number of bytes, length of time, where the time values can be configured between [assignment: minimum configurable rekey time] and [assignment: maximum configurable rekey time]]
                              • IKEv2 Child SA lifetimes can be configured by a Security Administrator based on [selection: number of bytes, length of time, where the time values can be configured between [assignment: minimum configurable rekey time] and [assignment: maximum configurable rekey time]]
                              ].
                              Application Note:

                              Application Note 66

                              The ST author chooses either the IKEv1 requirements or IKEv2 requirements (or both, depending on the selection in FCS_IPSEC_EXT.1.5). The ST author chooses either volume-based lifetimes or time-based lifetimes (or a combination). The range between the minimum and maximum rekeys time must include a rekey time that causes a rekey to occur at or slightly before 8 hours. The exact values supported may vary by TOE implementation. Some TOEs might require the administrators to ensure rekeying prior to the desired time (e.g., configure a time value of 7h 59min to ensure the actual rekey is performed no later than 8h), while other TOEs might automatically ensure rekeying is performed prior to the configured time.

                              This requirement must be accomplished by providing Security Administrator-configurable lifetimes. Hardcoded limits do not meet this requirement.

                              The TSF shall generate the secret value x used in the IKE Diffie-Hellman key exchange (“x” in g^x mod p) using the random bit generator specified in FCS_RBG.1, and having a length of at least [assignment: (one or more) number(s) of bits that is at least twice the security strength of the negotiated Diffie-Hellman group] bits.
                              Application Note:

                              Application Note 67

                              For DH groups 19 and 20, the ‘x’ value is the point multiplier for the generator point G.

                              Since the implementation may allow different Diffie-Hellman groups to be negotiated for use in forming the SAs, the assignment in FCS_IPSEC_EXT.1.9 may contain multiple values. For each DH group supported, the ST author consults Table 2 in NIST SP 800-57 “Recommendation for Key Management –Part 1: General” to determine the security strength (‘bits of security’) associated with the DH group. Each unique value is then used to fill in the assignment for this element. For example, suppose the implementation supports DH group 14 (2048-bit MODP) and group 20 (ECDH using NIST curve P-384). From Table 2, the bits of security value for group 14 is 112, and for group 20 is 192.

                              The TSF shall generate nonces used in [selection: IKEv1, IKEv2] protocol exchanges of length [selection: according to the security strength associated with the negotiated Diffie-Hellman group, at least 128 bits in size and at least half the output size of the negotiated pseudorandom function (PRF) hash].
                              Application Note:

                              Application Note 68

                              This SFR is for the IKEv1 (phase 1 and phase 2) and IKEv2 (IKE_AUTH and CREATE_CHILD_SA) protocol exchanges.

                              The ST author must select the second option for nonce lengths if IKEv2 is selected (as this is mandated in RFC 7296). The ST author may select either option for IKEv1.

                              The security strengths of DH groups are defined in NIST SP 800-57.

                              Because nonces may be exchanged before the DH group is negotiated, the nonce used should be large enough to support all TOE-chosen proposals in the exchange.

                              The TSF shall ensure that IKE protocols implement DH Group(s) [selection:
                              • [selection: 14 (2048-bit MODP), 15 (3072-bit MODP), 16 (4096-bit MODP), 17 (6144-bit MODP), 18 (8192-bit MODP)] according to RFC 3526
                              • [selection: 19 (256-bit Random ECP), 20 (384-bit Random ECP), 21 (521-bit Random ECP)] according to RFC 5114
                              ].
                              Application Note:

                              Application Note 69

                              The selections are used to specify additional DH groups supported. This applies to IKEv1 and IKEv2 exchanges.

                              The TSF shall be able to ensure that the strength of the symmetric algorithm (in terms of the number of bits in the key) negotiated to protect the [selection: IKEv1 Phase 1, IKEv2 IKE_SA] connection is greater than or equal to the strength of the symmetric algorithm (in terms of the number of bits in the key) negotiated to protect the [selection: IKEv1 Phase 2, IKEv2 CHILD_SA] connection.
                              Application Note:

                              Application Note 70

                              The ST author chooses either or both of the IKE selections based on what is implemented by the TOE. Obviously, the IKE version(s) chosen should be consistent not only in this element, but with other choices for other elements in this component. While it is acceptable for this capability to be configurable, the default configuration in the evaluated configuration (either ‘out of the box’ or by configuration guidance in the AGD documentation) must enable this functionality.

                              The TSF shall ensure that all IKE protocols perform peer authentication using [selection: RSA, ECDSA] that use X.509v3 certificates that conform to RFC 4945 and [selection: Pre-shared Keys that conform to RFC 8784, no other method].
                              Application Note:

                              Application Note 71

                              At least one public-key-based Peer Authentication method is required in order to conform to this cPP; one or more of the public key schemes is chosen by the ST author to reflect what is implemented. The ST author also ensures that appropriate FCS requirements reflecting the algorithms used (and key generation capabilities, if provided) are listed to support those methods. Note: The TSS will elaborate on the way in which these algorithms are to be used (for example, RFC 2409 specifies three authentication methods using public keys; each one supported will be described in the TSS).

                              If the selection “Pre-shared Keys that conform to RFC 8784” is chosen, the selection-based requirement FIA_PSK_EXT.1 in Annex B must be claimed.

                              The TSF shall only establish a trusted channel if the presented identifier in the received certificate matches the configured reference identifier, where the presented and reference identifiers are of the following fields and types: [selection: SAN: IP address, SAN: Fully Qualified Domain Name (FQDN), SAN: user FQDN, CN: IP address, CN: Fully Qualified Domain Name (FQDN), CN: user FQDN, Distinguished Name (DN)] and [selection: no other reference identifier type, [assignment: other supported reference identifier types]].
                              Application Note:

                              Application Note 72

                              When using RSA or ECDSA certificates for peer authentication, the reference and presented identifiers take the form of either a DN, IP address, FQDN or user FQDN. The reference identifier is the identifier the TOE expects to receive from the peer during IKE authentication. The presented identifier is the identifier that is contained within the peer certificate body. The ST author should select the presented and reference identifier types supported and may optionally assign additional supported identifier types in the second selection. Excluding the DN identifier type (which is necessarily the Subject DN in the peer certificate), the TOE may support the identifier in either the Common Name or Subject Alternative Name (SAN) or both.

                              The critical requirement of X.509 identifiers is the ability to bind the public key uniquely to an identity. This can be achieved by using strongly-typed identifiers or controlling the CA and certificate issuance. One recommended method for identity verification is supporting the use of the Subject Alternative Name (SAN) extension using DNS names, URI names, or Service Names. However, the support for a SAN extension is optional as long as identifier uniqueness can be achieved by other means.

                              Supported peer certificate algorithms are the same as FCS_IPSEC_EXT.1.13

                              402. The evaluator shall examine the TSS and determine that it describes what takes place when a packet is processed by the TOE, e.g., the algorithm used to process the packet. The TSS describes how the SPD is implemented and the rules for processing both inbound and outbound packets in terms of the IPsec policy. The TSS describes the rules that are available and the resulting actions available after matching a rule. The TSS describes how those rules and actions form the SPD in terms of the BYPASS (e.g., no encryption), DISCARD (e.g., drop the packet), and PROTECT (e.g., encrypt the packet) actions defined in RFC 4301.

                              403. As noted in Section 4.4.1 of RFC 4301, the processing of entries in the SPD is non-trivial and the evaluator shall determine that the description in the TSS is sufficient to determine which rules will be applied given the rule structure implemented by the TOE. For example, if the TOE allows specification of ranges, conditional rules, etc., the evaluator shall determine that the description of rule processing (for both inbound and outbound packets) is sufficient to determine the action that will be applied, especially in the case where two different rules may apply. This description shall cover both the initial packets (that is, no SA is established on the interface or for that particular packet) as well as packets that are part of an established SA.

                              404. None.

                              405. The evaluator shall check the TSS to ensure it states that the VPN can be established to operate in transport mode and/or tunnel mode (as identified in FCS_IPSEC_EXT.1.3).

                              406. The evaluator shall examine the TSS to verify that the selected algorithms are implemented. In addition, the evaluator shall ensure that the SHA-based HMAC algorithm conforms to the algorithms specified in FCS_COP.1/KeyedHash Cryptographic Operations (for keyed-hash message authentication) and if the SHA-based HMAC function truncated output is utilised it must also be described.

                              407. The evaluator shall examine the TSS to verify that IKEv1 and/or IKEv2 are implemented.

                              The following content should be included if:

                              408. For IKEv1 implementations, the evaluator shall examine the TSS to ensure that, in the description of the IPsec protocol, it states that aggressive mode is not used for IKEv1 Phase 1 exchanges, and that only main mode is used. It may be that this is a configurable option.

                              409. The evaluator shall ensure the TSS identifies the algorithms used for encrypting the IKEv1 and/or IKEv2 payload, and that the algorithms chosen in the selection of the requirement are included in the TSS discussion.

                              410. The evaluator shall ensure the TSS identifies the lifetime configuration method used for limiting the IKEv1 Phase 1 SA lifetime and/or the IKEv2 SA lifetime. The evaluator shall verify that the selection made here corresponds to the selection in FCS_IPSEC_EXT.1.7.

                              411. The evaluator shall ensure the TSS identifies the lifetime configuration method used for limiting the IKEv1 Phase 2 SA lifetime and/or the IKEv2 Child SA lifetime. The evaluator shall verify that the selection made here corresponds to the selection in FCS_IPSEC_EXT.1.8.

                              412. The evaluator shall check to ensure that, for each DH group supported, the TSS describes the process for generating "x". The evaluator shall verify that the TSS indicates that the random number generated that meets the requirements in this PP is used, and that the length of "x" meets the stipulations in the requirement.

                              The following content should be included if:

                              413. If the first selection is chosen, the evaluator shall check to ensure that, for each DH group supported, the TSS describes the process for generating each nonce. The evaluator shall verify that the TSS indicates that the random number generated that meets the requirements in this PP is used, and that the length of the nonces meet the stipulations in the requirement.

                              The following content should be included if:

                              414. If the second selection is chosen, the evaluator shall check to ensure that, for each PRF hash supported, the TSS describes the process for generating each nonce. The evaluator shall verify that the TSS indicates that the random number generated that meets the requirements in this PP is used, and that the length of the nonces meet the stipulations in the requirement.

                              415. The evaluator shall check to ensure that the DH groups specified in the requirement are listed as being supported in the TSS. If there is more than one DH group supported, the evaluator shall check to ensure the TSS describes how a particular DH group is specified/negotiated with a peer.

                              416. The evaluator shall check that the TSS describes the potential strengths (in terms of the number of bits in the symmetric key) of the algorithms that are allowed for the IKE and ESP exchanges. The TSS shall also describe the checks that are done when negotiating IKEv1 Phase 2 and/or IKEv2 CHILD_SA suites to ensure that the strength (in terms of the number of bits of key in the symmetric algorithm) of the negotiated algorithm is less than or equal to that of the IKE SA this is protecting the negotiation.

                              417. The evaluator shall ensure that the TSS identifies RSA and/or ECDSA as being used to perform peer authentication. The description must be consistent with the algorithms as specified in FCS_COP.1/SigVer Cryptographic Operation - Signature Verification.

                              The following content should be included if:

                              418. If pre-shared keys are chosen in the selection, the evaluator shall check to ensure that the TSS describes how pre-shared keys are established and used in authentication of IPsec connections. The description in the TSS shall also indicate how pre-shared key establishment is accomplished for TOEs that can generate a pre-shared key as well as TOEs that simply use a pre-shared key.

                              419. The evaluator shall ensure that the TSS describes how the TOE compares the peer’s presented identifier to the reference identifier. This description shall include which field(s) of the certificate are used as the presented identifier (DN, Common Name, or SAN). If the TOE simultaneously supports the same identifier type in the CN and SAN, the TSS shall describe how the TOE prioritizes the comparisons (e.g., the result of comparison if CN matches but SAN does not). If the location (e.g., CN or SAN) of non-DN identifier types must explicitly be configured as part of the reference identifier, the TSS shall state this. If the ST author assigned an additional identifier type, the TSS description shall also include a description of that type and the method by which that type is compared to the peer’s presented certificate, including what field(s) are compared and which fields take precedence in the comparison.

                              Guidance

                              420. The evaluator shall examine the guidance documentation to verify it instructs the Administrator how to construct entries into the SPD that specify a rule for processing a packet. The description includes all three cases – a rule that ensures packets are encrypted/decrypted, dropped, and flow through the TOE without being encrypted. The evaluator shall determine that the description in the guidance documentation is consistent with the description in the TSS, and that the level of detail in the guidance documentation is sufficient to allow the administrator to set up the SPD in an unambiguous fashion. This includes a discussion of how ordering of rules impacts the processing of an IP packet.

                              421. None.

                              422. The evaluator shall confirm that the guidance documentation contains instructions on how to configure the connection in each mode selected.

                              423. The evaluator shall check the guidance documentation to ensure it provides instructions on how to configure the TOE to use the algorithms selected.

                              424. The evaluator shall check the guidance documentation to ensure it instructs the administrator how to configure the TOE to use IKEv1 and/or IKEv2 (as selected), and how to configure the TOE to perform NAT traversal (if selected).

                              425. If the IKEv1 Phase 1 mode requires configuration of the TOE prior to its operation, the evaluator shall check the guidance documentation to ensure that instructions for this configuration are contained within that guidance.

                              426. The evaluator shall ensure that the guidance documentation describes the configuration of all selected algorithms in the requirement.

                              427. The evaluator shall verify that the values for SA lifetimes can be configured and that the instructions for doing so are located in the guidance documentation. If time-based limits are supported, configuring the limit may lead to a rekey no later than the specified limit. For some implementations, it may be necessary, though, to configure the TOE with a lower time value to ensure a rekey is performed before the maximum SA lifetime of 24 hours is exceeded (e.g., configure a time value of 23h 45min to ensure the actual rekey is performed no later than 24h). The evaluator shall verify that the guidance documentation allows the Administrator to configure the Phase 1 SA value of 24 hours or provides sufficient instruction about the time value to configure to ensure the rekey is performed no later than the maximum SA lifetime of 24 hours. It is not permitted to configure a value of 24 hours if that leads to an actual rekey after more than 24hours. Currently there are no values mandated for the number of bytes, the evaluator just ensures that this can be configured if selected in the requirement.

                              428. The evaluator shall verify that the values for SA lifetimes can be configured and that the instructions for doing so are located in the guidance documentation. If time-based limits are supported, configuring the limit may lead to a rekey no later than the specified limit. For some implementations, it may be necessary, though, to configure the TOE with a lower time value to ensure a rekey is performed before the maximum SA lifetime of 8 hours is exceeded (e.g., configure a time value of 7h 45min to ensure the actual rekey is performed no later than 8h). The evaluator shall verify that the guidance documentation allows the Administrator to configure the Phase 2 SA value of 8 hours or provides sufficient instruction about the time value to configure to ensure the rekey is performed no later than the maximum SA lifetime of 8 hours. It is not permitted to configure a value of 8 hours if that leads to an actual rekey after more than 8 hours. Currently there are no values mandated for the number of bytes, the evaluator just ensures that this can be configured if selected in the requirement.

                              429. None.

                              429. None.

                              430. The evaluator shall ensure that the guidance documentation describes the configuration of all algorithms selected in the requirement.

                              431. None.

                              432. The evaluator shall ensure the guidance documentation describes how to set up the TOE to use certificates with RSA and/or ECDSA signatures and public keys.

                              433. The evaluator shall check that the guidance documentation describes how pre-shared keys are to be generated and established. The description in the guidance documentation shall also indicate how pre-shared key establishment is accomplished for TOEs that can generate a pre-shared key as well as TOEs that simply use a pre-shared key.

                              434. The evaluator shall ensure that the guidance documentation describes how to configure the TOE to connect to a trusted CA and ensure a valid certificate for that CA is loaded into the TOE and marked “trusted”.

                              435. The evaluator shall ensure that the operational guidance describes all supported identifiers, explicitly states whether the TOE supports the SAN extension or not and includes detailed instructions on how to configure the reference identifier(s) used to check the identity of peer(s). If the identifier scheme implemented by the TOE does not guarantee unique identifiers, the evaluator shall ensure that the operational guidance provides a set of warnings and/or CA policy recommendations that would result in secure TOE use.

                              Tests

                              436. The evaluator shall use the guidance documentation to configure the TOE to perform the following tests:


                              • Test FCS_IPSEC_EXT.1:1:

                                Test 1: The evaluator shall configure the SPD such that there is a rule for dropping a packet, encrypting a packet, and allowing a packet to flow in plaintext. The selectors used in the construction of the rule shall be different such that the evaluator can generate a packet and send packets to the gateway with the appropriate fields (fields that are used by the rule - e.g., the IP addresses, TCP/UDP ports) in the packet header. The evaluator shall perform both positive and negative test cases for each type of rule (e.g., a packet that matches the rule and another that does not match the rule). The evaluator shall observe via the audit trail, and packet captures that the TOE exhibited the expected behaviour: appropriate packets were dropped, allowed to flow without modification, encrypted by the IPsec implementation.

                              • Test FCS_IPSEC_EXT.1:2:

                                Test 2: The evaluator shall devise several tests that cover a variety of scenarios for packet processing. As with Test 1, the evaluator shall ensure both positive and negative test cases are constructed. These scenarios must exercise the range of possibilities for SPD entries and processing modes as outlined in the TSS and guidance documentation. Potential areas to cover include rules with overlapping ranges and conflicting entries, inbound and outbound packets, and packets that establish SAs as well as packets that belong to established SAs. The evaluator shall verify, via the audit trail and packet captures, for each scenario that the expected behaviour is exhibited, and is consistent with both the TSS and the guidance documentation.

                              437. The assurance activity for this element is performed in conjunction with the activities for FCS_IPSEC_EXT.1.1.

                              438. The evaluator shall use the guidance documentation to configure the TOE to perform the following tests:

                              • Test FCS_IPSEC_EXT.1:3:

                                Test 1: The evaluator shall configure the SPD such that there is a rule for dropping a packet, encrypting a packet, and allowing a packet to flow in plaintext. The evaluator may use the SPD that was created for verification of FCS_IPSEC_EXT.1.1. The evaluator shall construct a network packet that matches the rule to allow the packet to flow in plaintext and send that packet. The evaluator shall observe that the network packet is passed to the proper destination interface with no modification. The evaluator shall then modify a field in the packet header; such that it no longer matches the evaluator-created entries (there may be a “TOE created” final entry that discards packets that do not match any previous entries). The evaluator shall send the packet and observe that the packet was dropped.

                              439. The evaluator shall perform the following test(s) based on the selections chosen:


                                The following content should be included if:

                                Test 1: If tunnel mode is selected, the evaluator shall use the guidance documentation to configure the TOE to operate in tunnel mode and also configures a VPN peer to operate in tunnel mode. The evaluator shall configure the TOE and the VPN peer to use any of the allowable cryptographic algorithms, authentication methods, etc. to ensure an allowable SA can be negotiated. The evaluator shall then initiate a connection from the TOE to connect to the VPN peer. The evaluator shall observe (for example, in the audit trail and the captured packets) that a successful connection was established using the tunnel mode.

                                The following content should be included if:

                                Test 2: If transport mode is selected, the evaluator shall use the guidance documentation to configure the TOE to operate in transport mode and also configures a VPN peer to operate in transport mode. The evaluator shall configure the TOE and the VPN peer to use any of the allowed cryptographic algorithms, authentication methods, etc. to ensure an allowable SA can be negotiated. The evaluator shall then initiate a connection from the TOE to connect to the VPN peer. The evaluator shall observe (for example, in the audit trail and the captured packets) that a successful connection was established using the transport mode.

                              • Test FCS_IPSEC_EXT.1:4:

                                440. The evaluator shall configure the TOE as indicated in the guidance documentation configuring the TOE to use each of the supported algorithms, attempt to establish a connection using ESP, and verify that the attempt succeeds.

                              441. Tests are performed in conjunction with the other IPsec evaluation activities.


                              • Test FCS_IPSEC_EXT.1:5:

                                442. The evaluator shall configure the TOE to use the ciphersuite under test to encrypt the IKEv1 and/or IKEv2 payload and establish a connection with a peer device, which is configured to only accept the payload encrypted using the indicated ciphersuite. The evaluator shall confirm the algorithm was that used in the negotiation.

                              443. When testing this functionality, the evaluator shall ensure that both sides are configured appropriately. From the RFC “A difference between IKEv1 and IKEv2 is that in IKEv1 SA lifetimes were negotiated. In IKEv2, each end of the SA is responsible for enforcing its own lifetime policy on the SA and rekeying the SA when necessary. If the two ends have different lifetime policies, the end with the shorter lifetime will end up always being the one to request the rekeying. If the two ends have the same lifetime policies, it is possible that both will initiate a rekeying at the same time (which will result in redundant SAs). To reduce the probability of this happening, the timing of rekeying requests SHOULD be jittered.”

                              444. Each of the following tests shall be performed for each version of IKE selected in the FCS_IPSEC_EXT.1.5 protocol selection:


                              445. When testing this functionality, the evaluator shall ensure that both sides are configured appropriately. From the RFC “A difference between IKEv1 and IKEv2 is that in IKEv1 SA lifetimes were negotiated. In IKEv2, each end of the SA is responsible for enforcing its own lifetime policy on the SA and rekeying the SA when necessary. If the two ends have different lifetime policies, the end with the shorter lifetime will end up always being the one to request the rekeying. If the two ends have the same lifetime policies, it is possible that both will initiate a rekeying at the same time (which will result in redundant SAs). To reduce the probability of this happening, the timing of rekeying requests SHOULD be jittered.”

                              446. Each of the following tests shall be performed for each version of IKE selected in the FCS_IPSEC_EXT.1.5 protocol selection:


                              447. None.

                              448. The following tests shall be performed.


                                The following content should be included if:

                                Test 1: If IKEv1 is supported, Configure the TOE to use IKEv1:

                                b4dc9e75-c7b8-419a-b2c3-07556e0612e6

                                Test 1.a: If “according to the security strength associated with the negotiated Diffie- Hellman group” has been selected, for each supported authentication methods and DH groups, demonstrate the TOE uses phase 1 and phase 2 nonces meeting the strength requirement defined in NIST SP 800-57 for the appropriate DH group.

                                e522b874-fb49-476d-99b3-5a1f9a69e811

                                Test 1.b: If “at least 128-bits in size and at least half the output size of the negotiated pseudorandom function (PRF) hash” has been selected, for each supported authentication method and PRF hash, demonstrate the TOE uses phase 1 and phase 2 nonces suitable for the selected PRF.

                                  The following content should be included if:

                                  Test 2: If IKEv2 is supported, configure the TOE to use IKEv2:

                                  • For each supported DH group, demonstrate the TOE uses IKE_SA_INIT and CREATE_CHILD_SA nonces suitable for the selected PRF.

                                • Test FCS_IPSEC_EXT.1:6:

                                  449. For each supported DH group, the evaluator shall test to ensure that all supported IKE protocols can be successfully completed using that particular DH group.

                                450. The evaluator shall follow the guidance to configure the TOE to perform the following tests.




                                • Test FCS_IPSEC_EXT.1:7:

                                  Test 1: This test shall be performed for each version of IKE supported. The evaluator shall successfully negotiate an IPsec connection using each of the supported algorithms and hash functions identified in the requirements.

                                • Test FCS_IPSEC_EXT.1:8:

                                  Test 2: This test shall be performed for each version of IKE supported. The evaluator shall attempt to establish a SA for ESP that selects an encryption algorithm with more strength than that being used for the IKE SA (i.e., symmetric algorithm with a key size larger than that being used for the IKE SA). Such attempts should fail.

                                • Test FCS_IPSEC_EXT.1:9:

                                  Test 3: This test shall be performed for each version of IKE supported. The evaluator shall attempt to establish an IKE SA using an algorithm that is not one of the supported algorithms and hash functions identified in the requirements. Such an attempt should fail.

                                • Test FCS_IPSEC_EXT.1:10:

                                  Test 4: This test shall be performed for each version of IKE supported. The evaluator shall attempt to establish a SA for ESP (assumes the proper parameters were used to establish the IKE SA) that selects an encryption algorithm that is not identified in FCS_IPSEC_EXT.1.4. Such an attempt should fail.

                                451. For efficiency sake, the testing is combined with the testing for FIA_X509_EXT.1 and FIA_X509_EXT.2 from the Functional Package for X.509 (for IPsec connections), and FCS_IPSEC_EXT.1.1.

                                452. In the context of the tests below, a valid certificate is a certificate that passes FIA_X509_EXT.1 (from the Functional Package for X.509) validation checks but does not necessarily contain an authorised subject.

                                453. The evaluator shall perform the following tests:






                                  The following content should be included if:

                                  Test 1 [conditional]: For each CN/identifier type combination selected, the evaluator shall configure the peer’s reference identifier on the TOE (per the administrative guidance) to match the field in the peer’s presented certificate and shall verify that the IKE authentication succeeds. If the TOE prioritizes CN checking over SAN (through explicit configuration of the field when specifying the reference identifier or prioritization rules), the evaluator shall also configure the SAN so it contains an incorrect identifier of the correct type (e.g., the reference identifier on the TOE is example.com, the CN=example.com, and the SAN:FQDN=otherdomain.com) and verify that IKE authentication succeeds.

                                  The following content should be included if:

                                  Test 2 [conditional]: For each SAN/identifier type combination selected, the evaluator shall configure the peer’s reference identifier on the TOE (per the administrative guidance) to match the field in the peer’s presented certificate and shall verify that the IKE authentication succeeds. If the TOE prioritizes SAN checking over CN (through explicit specification of the field when specifying the reference identifier or prioritization rules), the evaluator shall also configure the CN so it contains an incorrect identifier formatted to be the same type (e.g., the reference identifier on the TOE is DNS-ID; identify certificate has an identifier in SAN with correct DNS-ID, CN with incorrect DNS-ID (and not a different type of identifier)) and verify that IKE authentication succeeds.

                                  The following content should be included if:

                                  Test 3 [conditional]: For each CN/identifier type combination selected, the evaluator shall:

                                  Create a valid certificate with the CN so it contains the valid identifier followed by ‘\0’. If the TOE prioritizes CN checking over SAN (through explicit specification of the field when specifying the reference identifier or prioritization rules) for the same identifier type, the evaluator shall configure the SAN so it matches the reference identifier.

                                  Configure the peer’s reference identifier on the TOE (per the administrative guidance) to match the CN without the ‘\0’ and verify that IKE authentication fails.

                                    The following content should be included if:

                                    Test 4 [conditional]: For each SAN/identifier type combination selected, the evaluator shall:

                                    Create a valid certificate with an incorrect identifier in the SAN. The evaluator shall configure a string representation of the correct identifier in the DN. If the TOE prioritizes CN checking over SAN (through explicit specification of the field when specifying the reference identifier or prioritization rules) for the same identifier type, the addition/modification shall be to any non-CN field of the DN. Otherwise, the addition/modification shall be to the CN.

                                    Configure the peer’s reference identifier on the TOE (per the administrative guidance) to match the correct identifier (expected in the SAN) and verify that IKE authentication fails.

                                      The following content should be included if:

                                      Test 5 [conditional]: If the TOE supports DN identifier types, the evaluator shall configure the peer’s reference identifier on the TOE (per the administrative guidance) to match the subject DN in the peer’s presented certificate and shall verify that the IKE authentication succeeds.

                                      The following content should be included if:

                                      Test 6 [conditional]: If the TOE supports DN identifier types, to demonstrate a bit-wise comparison of the DN, the evaluator shall create the following valid certificates and verify that the IKE authentication fails when each certificate is presented to the TOE:

                                      Duplicate the CN field, so the otherwise authorised DN contains two identical CNs.

                                      Append ‘\0’ to a non-CN field of an otherwise authorised DN.

                                      FCS_NTP_EXT.1 NTP Protocol

                                      The inclusion of this selection-based component depends upon selection in:

                                      This component must be included in the ST if any of the following SFRs are included:
                                      The TSF shall use only the following NTP version(s) [selection: NTP v3 (RFC 1305), NTP v4 (RFC 5905)].
                                      The TSF shall update its system time using [selection:
                                      • Authentication using [selection: SHA256, SHA384, SHA512, AES-CMAC-128 (RFC 8573), AES-CBC-128, AES-CBC-256] as the message digest algorithm(s);
                                      • [selection: IPsec, DTLS as defined in the Functional Package for TLS] to provide trusted communication between itself and an NTP time source.
                                      ].

                                      The TSF shall not update NTP timestamp from broadcast and/or multicast addresses.

                                      The TSF shall support configuration of at least three (3) NTP time sources in the Operational Environment.
                                      Application Note:

                                      Application Note 73

                                      The TOE has to support configuration of at least three time sources though it is not mandated that the TOE is configured to always use at least three time sources.

                                      454. The evaluator shall examine the TSS to ensure it identifies the version of NTP supported, how it is implemented and what approach the TOE uses to ensure the timestamp it receives from an NTP timeserver (or NTP peer) is from an authenticated source and the integrity of the time has been maintained.

                                      455. The TOE must support at least one of the methods or may use multiple methods, as specified in the SFR element 1.2. The evaluator shall ensure that each method selected in the ST is described in the TSS, including the version of NTP supported in element 1.1, the message digest algorithms used to verify the authenticity of the timestamp and/or the protocols used to ensure integrity of the timestamp.

                                      456. None.

                                      456. None.

                                      456. None.

                                      Guidance

                                      457. The evaluator shall examine the guidance documentation to ensure it provides the Security Administrator instructions as how to configure the version of NTP supported, how to configure multiple NTP servers for the TOE’s time source and how to configure the TOE to use the method(s) that are selected in the ST.

                                      458. For each of the secondary selections made in the ST, the evaluator shall examine the guidance document to ensure it instructs the Security Administrator how to configure the TOE to use the algorithms that support the authenticity of the timestamp and/or how to configure the TOE to use the protocols that ensure the integrity of the timestamp.

                                      Assurance Activity Note:

                                      Each primary selection in the SFR contains selections that specify a cryptographic algorithm or cryptographic protocol. For each of these secondary selections made in the ST, the evaluator shall examine the guidance documentation to ensure that the documentation instructs the Security Administrator how to configure the TOE to use the chosen option(s).

                                      459. The evaluator shall examine the guidance documentation to ensure it provides the Security Administrator instructions as how to configure the TOE to not accept broadcast and multicast NTP packets that would result in the timestamp being updated.

                                      460. None.

                                      Tests
                                      • Test FCS_NTP_EXT.1:1:

                                        461. The version of NTP selected in element 1.1 and specified in the ST shall be verified by observing establishment of a connection to an external NTP server known to be using the specified version(s) of NTP. This may be combined with tests of other aspects of FCS_NTP_EXT.1 as described below.

                                      462. The cryptographic algorithms selected in element 1.2 and specified in the ST will have been specified in an FCS_COP SFR and tested in the accompanying Evaluation Activity for that SFR. Likewise, the cryptographic protocol selected in in element 1.2 and specified in the ST will have been specified in an FCS SFR and tested in the accompanying Evaluation Activity for that SFR.


                                        The following content should be included if:

                                        [conditional] If the message digest algorithm is claimed in element 1.2, the evaluator shall configure the TOE and NTP server so the TOE can synchronize time using a claimed message digest algorithm. The evaluator shall modify the response(s) from the NTP server so the response(s) contains a MAC that was generated by a different message digest algorithm and confirm the TOE does not synchronize to this time source. Other than the invalid MAC, the NTP response(s) must be valid (e.g., key ID, key value used, timestamps).

                                        Note: Since the algorithm is not identified in the server response, this tests an incorrect algorithm and an invalid MAC.

                                      • Test FCS_NTP_EXT.1:2:

                                        The evaluator shall use a packet sniffer to capture the network traffic between the TOE and the NTP server. The evaluator shall use the captured network traffic, to verify the NTP version, to observe time change of the TOE and uses the TOE’s audit log to determine that the TOE accepted the NTP server’s timestamp update.

                                        The captured traffic is also used to verify that the appropriate message digest algorithm was used to authenticate the time source and/or the appropriate protocol was used to ensure integrity of the timestamp that was transmitted in the NTP packets.

                                      • Test FCS_NTP_EXT.1:3:

                                        463. The evaluator shall configure NTP server(s) to support periodic time updates to broadcast and multicast addresses. The evaluator shall confirm the TOE is configured to not accept broadcast and multicast NTP packets that would result in the timestamp being updated. The evaluator shall check that the time stamp is not updated after receipt of the broadcast and multicast packets.

                                      464. The evaluator shall perform the following tests:


                                      • Test FCS_NTP_EXT.1:4:

                                        Test 1: The evaluator shall confirm the TOE supports configuration of at least three (3) NTP time sources. The evaluator shall configure at least three NTP servers to support periodic time updates to the TOE. The evaluator shall confirm the TOE is configured to accept NTP packets that would result in the timestamp being updated from each of the NTP servers. The evaluator shall check that the time stamp is updated after receipt of the NTP packets. The purpose of this test to verify that the TOE can be configured to synchronize with multiple NTP servers. It is up to the evaluator to determine that the multisource update of the time information is appropriate and consistent with the behaviour prescribed by the RFC 1305 for NTPv3 and RFC 5905 for NTPv4.

                                      • Test FCS_NTP_EXT.1:5:

                                        Test 2: (The intent of this test is to ensure that the TOE would only accept NTP updates from configured NTP Servers.) The evaluator shall confirm that the TOE would not synchronize to other, not explicitly configured time sources by sending an otherwise valid but unsolicited NTP Server response indicating different time from the TOE’s current system time. This rogue time source needs to be configured in a way (e.g., degrade or disable valid and configured NTP servers) that could plausibly result in unsolicited updates becoming a preferred time source if they are not discarded by the TOE. The TOE is not mandated to respond in a detectable way or audit the occurrence of such unsolicited updates. It is up to the evaluator to craft and transmit unsolicited updates in a way that would be consistent with the behaviour of a correctly-functioning NTP server.

                                      FCS_RBG.2 Random Bit Generation (External Seeding)

                                      The inclusion of this selection-based component depends upon selection in:

                                      This component must be included in the ST if any of the following SFRs are included:
                                      The TSF shall be able to accept a minimum input of [assignment: minimum input length greater than zero] from a TSF interface for obtaining entropy.
                                      Application Note:

                                      Application Note 55

                                      This requirement is claimed when a TOE uses one or more external sources of entropy to initialize or reseed a DRBG that is outside the TOE boundary. Seeding a DRBG is the same as initializing a DRBG. In the case of a network device this would only occur with a vND where the entropy source is provided by the underlying virtualization System (VS) platform. The ST author ensures that the assignment is completed with the minimum length of the input sufficient to initialize or reseed a DRBG.

                                      The TSF interface for the purpose of seeding here is the interface used to gather entropy for initializing or reseed.

                                      381. The evaluator shall examine the entropy documentation required by FCS_RBG.1 to verify that it identifies, for each DRBG function implemented by the TOE, the TSF external interface used to seed the TOE’s DRBG. The evaluator shall verify that this includes the amount of sampled data and the min-entropy rate of the sampled data such that it can be determined that sufficient entropy can be made available for the highest strength keys that the TSF can generate (e.g., 256 bits). If the seed data cannot be assumed to have full entropy (e.g., the min-entropy of the sampled bits is less than 1), the evaluator shall ensure that the entropy documentation describes the method by which the TOE estimates the amount of entropy that has been accumulated to ensure that sufficient data is collected and any conditioning that the TSF applies to the output data to create a seed of sufficient size with full entropy.

                                      382. There are no additional TSS evaluation activities for this component.

                                      Guidance

                                      383. There are no additional Guidance evaluation activities for this component.

                                      Tests

                                      384. There are no test activities for this component.

                                      FCS_RBG.3 Random Bit Generation (Internal Seeding - Single Source)

                                      This component must be included in the ST if any of the following SFRs are included:
                                      The TSF shall be able to seed the DRBG using a [selection, choose one of: TSF software-based entropy source, TSF hardware-based entropy source] [assignment: name of entropy source] with [assignment: number of bits] bits of min-entropy.
                                      Application Note:

                                      Application Note 56

                                      This requirement is claimed when a TOE uses a single internal source of entropy to initialize or reseed a DRBG that is within the TOE boundary. Seeding a DRBG is the same as initializing a DRBG.

                                      Hardware-based noise sources are entropy sources whose primary function is noise generation, such as ring oscillators, diodes, and thermal noise. While a TOE may use software to collect the noise from these hardware sources, these are not software-based.

                                      Software-based noise sources generate noise as a byproduct of their normal operation. Examples of software-based noise sources can be user or system-based events such as reading the least significant bits from an event timer, etc.

                                      The TOE collects enough input from the internal noise source such that the total measured entropy of the input is sufficient to initialize or reseed a DRBG. The ST author ensures that the assignment is completed with the number of bits of the input sufficient to initialize or reseed a DRBG.

                                      385. The evaluator shall examine the entropy documentation required by FCS_RBG.1 to verify that it identifies, for each DRBG function implemented by the TOE, the TSF entropy source used to seed the TOE’s DRBG. The evaluator shall verify that this includes the amount of sampled data and the min-entropy rate of the sampled data such that it can be determined that sufficient entropy can be made available for the highest strength keys that the TSF can generate (e.g., 256 bits). If the seed data cannot be assumed to have full entropy (e.g., the min-entropy of the sampled bits is less than 1), the evaluator shall ensure that the entropy documentation describes the method by which the TOE estimates the amount of entropy that has been accumulated to ensure that sufficient data is collected and any conditioning that the TSF applies to the output data to create a seed of sufficient size with full entropy.

                                      386. There are no additional TSS evaluation activities for this component.

                                      Guidance

                                      387. There are no additional Guidance evaluation activities for this component.

                                      Tests

                                      388. There are no test activities for this component.

                                      FCS_RBG.4 Random Bit Generation (Internal Seeding - Multiple Sources)

                                      This component must be included in the ST if any of the following SFRs are included:
                                      The TSF shall be able to seed the DRBG using [selection: [assignment: number] TSF software-based entropy source(s), [assignment: number] TSF hardware-based entropy source(s)].
                                      Application Note:

                                      Application Note 57

                                      This requirement is claimed when a TOE uses two or more internal sources of entropy to initialize or reseed a DRBG. Seeding a DRBG is the same as initializing a DRBG. FCS_RBG.5 defines the mechanism by which these sources are combined to ensure sufficient minimum entropy.

                                      389. The evaluator shall examine the entropy documentation required by FCS_RBG.1 to verify that it identifies, for each DRBG function implemented by the TOE, each TSF entropy source used to seed the TOE’s DRBG. The evaluator shall verify that this includes the amount of sampled data and the min-entropy rate of the sampled data from each data source.

                                      390. There are no additional TSS evaluation activities for this component.

                                      Guidance

                                      391. There are no additional Guidance evaluation activities for this component.

                                      Tests

                                      392. There are no test activities for this component.

                                      FCS_RBG.5 Random Bit Generation (Combining Entropy Sources)

                                      This component must be included in the ST if any of the following SFRs are included:
                                      TSF shall [selection: hash, concatenate and hash, XOR, input into a linear feedback shift register, [assignment: combining operation]] [selection: output from TSF entropy source(s), input from TSF interface(s) for obtaining entropy] resulting in a minimum of [assignment: number of bits] bits of min-entropy to create the entropy input into the derivation function as defined in [selection: ISO/IEC 18031:2011, NIST SP 800-90A Revision 1].
                                      Application Note:

                                      Application Note 58

                                      This requirement is claimed when a TOE combines two or more sources of entropy to initialize or reseed a DRBG. Seeding a DRBG is the same as initializing a DRBG. The ST author ensures that the assignment is completed with the number of bits of the combined entropy sufficient to initialize or reseed a DRBG.

                                      One can apply NIST SP 800-90B (or AIS-31) statistical tests against internal noise sources (a.k.a. raw entropy) to confirm the min-entropy of the noise sources either in aggregate or individually. One should not apply NIST SP 800-90B (or AIS-31) statistical tests against external noise sources since the TOE is unable to enforce entropy requirements or conditioning requirements against external sources of entropy. However, the TSS may include estimates for min-entropy from external sources that contribute to the overall entropy requirements for the DRBG.

                                      393. Using the entropy sources specified in FCS_RBG.4, the evaluator shall examine the entropy documentation required by FCS_RBG.1 to verify that it describes the method by which the various entropy sources are combined into a single seed. This should include an estimation of the rate at which each noise source outputs data and whether this is dependent on any system-specific factors so that each source’s relative contribution to the overall entropy is understood. The evaluator shall verify that the resulting combination of sampled data and the min-entropy rate of the sampled data is described in sufficient detail to determine that sufficient entropy can be made available for the highest strength keys that the TSF can generate (e.g., 256 bits). If the seed data cannot be assumed to have full entropy (e.g., the min-entropy of the sampled bits is less than 1), the evaluator shall ensure that the entropy documentation describes the method by which the TOE estimates the amount of entropy that has been accumulated to ensure that sufficient data is collected and any conditioning that the TSF applies to the output data to create a seed of sufficient size with full entropy.

                                      394. There are no additional TSS evaluation activities for this component.

                                      Guidance

                                      395. There are no additional Guidance evaluation activities for this component.

                                      Tests

                                      396. There are no test activities for this component.

                                      B.3 Security Management (FMT)

                                      FMT_MOF.1/AutoUpdate Management of Security Functions Behaviour

                                      The TSF shall restrict the ability to [selection: enable, disable] the functions [selection: automatic checking for updates, automatic update]

                                      to Security Administrators.

                                      Application Note:

                                      Application Note 81

                                      FMT_MOF.1/AutoUpdate is only applicable and should be included if the TOE supports automatic checking for updates and/or automatic updates and allows them to be enabled and disabled. Enable and disable of automatic checking for updates and/or automatic updates is restricted to Security Administrators. The option “automatic update” may only be selected if digital signatures are used to validate the trusted update.

                                      492. For distributed TOEs, see Section 2.4.1.1.

                                      493. For non-distributed TOEs, the evaluator shall ensure the TSS describes how checking for automatic updates or automated updates (whichever is supported by the TOE) are performed to include required configuration settings to enable and disable automated checking or automated updates.

                                      Guidance

                                      494. For distributed TOEs, see Section 2.4.1.2.

                                      495. For non-distributed TOEs, the evaluator shall also ensure the TSS describes how checking for automatic updates or automated updates (whichever is supported by the TOE) are performed to include required configuration settings to enable and disable automated checking or automated updates (whichever is supported by the TOE).

                                      Tests

                                      496. The evaluator shall perform the following tests:


                                      • Test FMT_MOF.1/AutoUpdate:1:

                                        Test 1: The evaluator shall try to enable and disable automatic checking for updates or automatic updates (whichever is supported by the TOE) without prior authentication as Security Administrator (by authenticating as a user with no administrator privileges or without user authentication). The attempt to enable/disable automatic checking for updates should fail. = When there is an implementation where no other users than the Security Administrator can be defined, the user might not be able to get to the point where the attempt to enable/disable automatic checking for updates can be executed without user authentication. In that case it shall be demonstrated that access control mechanisms prevent execution up to the step that can be reached without authentication as Security Administrator.

                                      • Test FMT_MOF.1/AutoUpdate:2:

                                        Test 2: The evaluator shall try to enable and disable automatic checking for updates or automatic updates (whichever is supported by the TOE) with prior authentication as Security Administrator. The attempt to enable/disable automatic checking for updates should be successful.

                                      FMT_MOF.1/Functions Management of Security Functions Behaviour

                                      This component must be included in the ST if any of the following SFRs are included:
                                      The TSF shall restrict the ability to [selection: determine the behaviour of, modify the behaviour of] the functions [selection: transmission of audit data to an external IT entity, handling of audit data, audit functionality when Local Audit Storage Space is full]

                                      to Security Administrators.

                                      Application Note:

                                      Application Note 82

                                      FMT_MOF.1/Functions should be chosen if one or more of the following scenarios apply:

                                      • If the transmission protocol for transmission of audit data to an external IT entity as defined in FAU_STG_EXT.1.1 is configurable, “transmission of audit data to an external IT entity” should be chosen.

                                      • If the handling of audit data is configurable, “handling of audit data” must be chosen. The term “handling of audit data” refers to any administratively configurable selection or assignments in any FAU_STG_EXT.x SFR.

                                      • If the behaviour of the audit functionality is configurable when Local Audit Storage Space is full, “audit functionality when Local Audit Storage Space is full” must be chosen.

                                      The first selection for ‘determine the behaviour of’ and ‘modify the behaviour of’ should be done as appropriate. It might be necessary to have different selections for the first selection depending on the second selection (e.g., “handling of audit data” might require “determine the behaviour of” and “modify the behaviour of” for the first selection on the one hand and “audit functionality when Local Audit Storage Space is full” might require “modify the behaviour of” only). In that case FMT_MOF.1/Functions should be iterated with increasing number appended (i.e., FMT_MOF.1/Functions1, FMT_MOF.1/Functions2, etc.).

                                      497. For distributed TOEs, see Section 2.4.1.1.

                                      498. For non-distributed TOEs, the evaluator shall ensure that the TSS, for each administrative function identified, details how the Security Administrator determines or modifies the behaviour of (whichever is supported by the TOE) transmitting audit data to an external IT entity, handling of audit data, and audit functionality when Local Audit Storage Space is full (whichever is supported by the TOE).

                                      Guidance

                                      499. For distributed TOEs, see Section 2.4.1.2.

                                      500. For non-distributed TOEs, the evaluator shall also ensure the Guidance Documentation describes how the Security Administrator determines or modifies the behaviour of (whichever is supported by the TOE) transmitting audit data to an external IT entity, handling of audit data, and audit functionality when Local Audit Storage Space is full (whichever is supported by the TOE) are performed to include required configuration settings.

                                      Tests

                                      If ‘transmission of audit data to external IT entity’ is selected from the second selection together with 'modify the behaviour of' in the first selection

                                      501. The evaluator shall perform the following tests:


                                      • Test FMT_MOF.1/Functions:1:

                                        Test 1: The evaluator shall try to modify all security related parameters for configuration of the transmission protocol for transmission of audit data to an external IT entity without prior authentication as Security Administrator (by authentication as a user with no administrator privileges or without user authentication at all). Attempts to modify parameters without prior authentication must fail.

                                        When there is an implementation where no other users than the Security Administrator can be defined, the user might not be able to get to the point where the attempt to modify the security related parameters can be executed without user authentication. In that case it shall be demonstrated that access control mechanisms prevent execution up to the step that can be reached without authentication as Security Administrator.

                                      • Test FMT_MOF.1/Functions:2:

                                        Test 2: The evaluator shall try to modify all security related parameters for configuration of the transmission protocol for transmission of audit data to an external IT entity with prior authentication as Security Administrator. The effects of the modifications should be confirmed.

                                        The evaluator does not have to test all possible values of the security related parameters for configuration of the transmission protocol for transmission of audit data to an external IT entity but at least one allowed value per parameter.

                                      If 'handling of audit data' is selected from the second selection together with 'modify the behaviour of' in the first selection

                                      502. The evaluator shall perform the following tests:


                                      • Test FMT_MOF.1/Functions:3:

                                        Test 1: The evaluator shall try to modify all security related parameters for configuration of the handling of audit data without prior authentication as Security Administrator (by authentication as a user with no administrator privileges, or without user authentication at all). Attempts to modify parameters without prior authentication must fail.

                                        When there is an implementation where no other users than the Security Administrator can be defined, the user might not be able to get to the point where the attempt can be executed without user authentication. In that case it shall be demonstrated that access control mechanisms prevent execution up to the step that can be reached without authentication as Security Administrator. The term ‘handling of audit data’ refers to the different options for selection and assignments in SFRs FAU_STG_EXT.1.4, FAU_STG_EXT.1.5 and FAU_STG_EXT.2.

                                      • Test FMT_MOF.1/Functions:4:

                                        Test 2: The evaluator shall try to modify all security related parameters for configuration of the handling of audit data with prior authentication as Security Administrator. The effects of the modifications shall be confirmed. The term ‘handling of audit data’ refers to the different options for selection and assignments in SFRs FAU_STG_EXT.1.4, FAU_STG_EXT.1.5 and FAU_STG_EXT.2.

                                        The evaluator does not necessarily have to test all possible values of the security related parameters for configuration of the handling of audit data, but at least one allowed value per parameter must be tested.

                                      If 'audit functionality when Local Audit Storage Space is full' is selected from the second selection together with 'modify the behaviour of' in the first selection

                                      503. The evaluator shall perform the following tests:


                                      • Test FMT_MOF.1/Functions:5:

                                        Test 1: The evaluator shall try to modify the behaviour when Local Audit Storage Space is full without prior authentication as Security Administrator (by authentication as a user with no administrator privileges or without user authentication at all). This attempt should fail.

                                        When there is an implementation where no other users than the Security Administrator can be defined, the user might not be able to get to the point where the attempt can be executed without user authentication. In that case it shall be demonstrated that access control mechanisms prevent execution up to the step that can be reached without authentication as Security Administrator.

                                      • Test FMT_MOF.1/Functions:6:

                                        Test 2: The evaluator shall try to modify the behaviour when Local Audit Storage Space is full with prior authentication as Security Administrator. This attempt should be successful. The effect of the change shall be verified.

                                        The evaluator does not necessarily have to test all possible values for the behaviour when Local Audit Storage Space is full but at least one change between allowed values for the behaviour must be tested.

                                      If in the first selection 'determine the behaviour of' has been chosen together with for any of the options in the second selection

                                      504. The evaluator shall perform the following tests:


                                      • Test FMT_MOF.1/Functions:7:

                                        Test 1: The evaluator shall try to determine the behaviour of all options chosen from the second selection without prior authentication as Security Administrator (by authentication as a user with no administrator privileges or without user authentication at all). This can be done in one test or in separate tests. The attempt(s) to determine the behaviour of the selected functions without administrator authentication shall fail.

                                        When there is an implementation where other users than the Security Administrator can be defined, the user might not be able to get to the point where the attempt can be executed without user authentication. In that case it shall be demonstrated that access control mechanisms prevent execution up to the step that can be reached without authentication as Security Administrator.

                                      • Test FMT_MOF.1/Functions:8:

                                        Test 2: The evaluator shall try to determine the behaviour of all options chosen from the second selection with prior authentication as Security Administrator. This can be done in one test or in separate tests. The attempt(s) to determine the behaviour of the selected functions with Security Administrator authentication shall be successful.

                                      FMT_MOF.1/Services Management of Security Functions Behaviour

                                      The TSF shall restrict the ability to start and stop the functions services to Security Administrators.

                                      Application Note:

                                      Application Note 80

                                      FMT_MOF.1/Services should only be chosen if the Security Administrator has the ability to start and stop services and the corresponding option has been selected in FMT_SMF.1.

                                      In FMT_MOF.1.1/Services 'enable and disable' have been refined to 'start and stop' and 'the functions: [assignment: list of functions]' has been refined to 'services'.

                                      With respect to FAU_GEN.1.1, FMT_SMF.1 and FMT_MOF.1/Services the term ‘services’ refers to trusted path and trusted channel communications, on demand self-tests, trusted update and Administrator sessions (that exist under the trusted path) (e.g., netconf).

                                      487. For distributed TOEs, see Section 2.4.1.1.

                                      488. For non-distributed TOEs, the evaluator shall verify that the TSS lists the services that the Security Administrator is able to start and stop and how that operation is performed.

                                      Guidance

                                      489. For distributed TOEs, see Section 2.4.1.2.

                                      490. For non-distributed TOEs, the evaluator shall also verify that the Guidance Documentation describes how the TSS lists the services that the Security Administrator is able to start and stop and how that operation is performed.

                                      Tests

                                      491. The evaluator shall perform the following tests:


                                      • Test FMT_MOF.1/Services:1:

                                        Test 1: The evaluator shall try to enable and disable at least one of the services as defined in the Application Notes for FAU_GEN.1.1 (whichever is supported by the TOE) without prior authentication as Security Administrator (either by authenticating as a user with no administrator privileges, if possible, or without prior authentication at all). The attempt to enable/disable this service/these services should fail.

                                        When there is an implementation where no other users other than the Security Administrator can be defined, the user might not be able to get to the point where the attempt to enable/disable this service/these services can be executed without user authentication. In that case it shall be demonstrated that access control mechanisms prevent execution up to the step that can be reached without authentication as Security Administrator.

                                      • Test FMT_MOF.1/Services:2:

                                        Test 2: The evaluator shall try to enable and disable at least one of the services as defined in the Application Notes for FAU_GEN.1.1 (whichever is supported by the TOE) with prior authentication as Security Administrator. The attempt to enable/disable this service/these services should be successful.

                                      B.4 Protection of the TSF (FPT)

                                      FPT_TUD_EXT.2 Trusted Update Based on Certificates

                                      The inclusion of this selection-based component depends upon selection in:

                                      This component must be included in the ST if any of the following SFRs are included:
                                      The TSF shall check the validity of the code signing certificate before installing each update.
                                      If revocation information is not available for a certificate in the trust chain that is not a trusted certificate designated as a trust anchor, the TSF shall [selection: not install the update, allow the Administrator to choose whether to accept the certificate in these cases].
                                      If the certificate is deemed invalid because the certificate has expired, the TSF shal [selection: allow the Administrator to choose whether to install the update in these cases, not accept the certificate].

                                      If the certificate is deemed invalid for reasons other than expiration or revocation information being unavailable, the TSF shall not install the update.

                                      Application Note:

                                      Application Note 79

                                      This component must be included in the ST if “X.509 digital signature mechanism” is selected in FPT_TUD_EXT.1.3.

                                      Validity is determined in accordance with FIA_X509_EXT.1. in the Functional Package for X.509

                                      It is acceptable to provide a manual method for an administrator to provide revocation information (e.g., CRL upload) in addition to retrieving revocation information automatically in accordance with FIA_X509_EXT.1 and FIA_X509_EXT.2 in the Functional Package for X.509. It is expected that current updates are signed using current (not expired) certificates that will be valid at least until the next expected update. However, an administrator may desire to install previous updates that are signed by expired certificates. To indicate support for this practice, the author of the ST selects whether the certificate will be accepted, rejected, or the choice is left to the Administrator to accept or reject the certificate.

                                      482. The evaluator shall verify that the TSS contains a description of how the certificates are contained on the device. The evaluator also ensures that the TSS (or guidance documentation) describes how the certificates are installed/updated/selected, if necessary.

                                      483. The evaluator shall verify that the TSS describes how the TOE reacts if X.509v3 certificates are used for trusted updates and the Security Administrator attempts to perform the trusted update using an expired certificate.

                                      484. The TSS shall describe the point at which revocation checking is performed and describe whether the Security Administrator can manually provide revocation information. It is expected that revocation checking is performed when a certificate is used when performing trusted updates. It is not sufficient to verify the status of a X.509v3 certificate only when it is loaded onto the device.

                                      Guidance

                                      485. The evaluator shall verify that the guidance documentation describes how the TOE reacts if X.509v3 certificates are used for trusted updates and the administrator attempts to perform the trusted update using an expired certificate. The evaluator shall verify any Security Administrator actions related to revocation checking, both accepting or rejecting certificates and manually providing revocation information. The description shall correspond to the description in the TSS.

                                      Tests

                                      486. The evaluator shall perform the following tests:



                                      • Test FPT_TUD_EXT.2:1:

                                        Test 1: The evaluator shall verify that the update mechanism includes a certificate validation according to FIA_X509_EXT.1 (in the Functional Package for X.509) and a check for the Code Signing purpose in the extendedKeyUsage.

                                      • Test FPT_TUD_EXT.2:2:

                                        Test 2: The evaluator shall digitally sign the update with an invalid certificate and verify that update installation fails. The evaluator shall digitally sign the application with a certificate that does not have the Code Signing purpose and verify that application installation fails. The evaluator shall repeat the test using a valid certificate and a certificate that contains the Code Signing purpose and verify that the application installation succeeds. The evaluator shall use a previously valid but expired certificate and verifies that the TOE reacts as described in the TSS and the guidance documentation. Testing for this element is performed in conjunction with the assurance activities for FPT_TUD_EXT.1.

                                      • Test FPT_TUD_EXT.2:3:

                                        Test 3: The evaluator shall demonstrate that checking the validity of a certificate is performed at the time a certificate is used when performing trusted updates. It is not sufficient to verify the status of a X.509v3 certificate only when it is loaded onto the device.

                                      Appendix C - Entropy Documentation and Assessment

                                      blah

                                      Appendix D - Glossary

                                      Appendix E - Acronyms

                                      Table 15: Acronyms
                                      AcronymMeaning
                                      AESAdvanced Encryption Standard
                                      APIApplication Programming Interface
                                      APIApplication Programming Interface
                                      appApplication
                                      ASLRAddress Space Layout Randomization
                                      Base-PPBase Protection Profile
                                      CCCommon Criteria
                                      CEMCommon Evaluation Methodology
                                      CESGCommunications-Electronics Security Group
                                      CMCCertificate Management over CMS
                                      CMSCryptographic Message Syntax
                                      CNCommon Names
                                      cPPCollaborative Protection Profile
                                      CRLCertificate Revocation List
                                      CSAComputer Security Act
                                      CSPCritical Security Parameters
                                      DARData At Rest
                                      DEPData Execution Prevention
                                      DESData Encryption Standard
                                      DHEDiffie-Hellman Ephemeral
                                      DNSDomain Name System
                                      DRBGDeterministic Random Bit Generator
                                      DSSDigital Signature Standard
                                      DSSDigital Signature Standard
                                      DTDate/Time Vector
                                      DTLSDatagram Transport Layer Security
                                      EAPExtensible Authentication Protocol
                                      ECDHEElliptic Curve Diffie-Hellman Ephemeral
                                      ECDSAElliptic Curve Digital Signature Algorithm
                                      EPExtended Package
                                      ESTEnrollment over Secure Transport
                                      FIPSFederal Information Processing Standards
                                      FPFunctional Package
                                      HMACHash-based Message Authentication Code
                                      HTTPHypertext Transfer Protocol
                                      HTTPSHypertext Transfer Protocol Secure
                                      IETFInternet Engineering Task Force
                                      IPInternet Protocol
                                      ISOInternational Organization for Standardization
                                      ITInformation Technology
                                      ITSEFInformation Technology Security Evaluation Facility
                                      NIAPNational Information Assurance Partnership
                                      NISTNational Institute of Standards and Technology
                                      OCSPOnline Certificate Status Protocol
                                      OEOperational Environment
                                      OIDObject Identifier
                                      OMBOffice of Management and Budget
                                      OSOperating System
                                      PIIPersonally Identifiable Information
                                      PKIPublic Key Infrastructure
                                      PPProtection Profile
                                      PPProtection Profile
                                      PP-ConfigurationProtection Profile Configuration
                                      PP-ModuleProtection Profile Module
                                      RBGRandom Bit Generator
                                      RFCRequest for Comment
                                      RNGRandom Number Generator
                                      RNGVSRandom Number Generator Validation System
                                      S/MIMESecure/Multi-purpose Internet Mail Extensions
                                      SANSubject Alternative Name
                                      SARSecurity Assurance Requirement
                                      SFRSecurity Functional Requirement
                                      SHASecure Hash Algorithm
                                      SIPSession Initiation Protocol
                                      STSecurity Target
                                      SWIDSoftware Identification
                                      TLSTransport Layer Security
                                      TOETarget of Evaluation
                                      TSFTOE Security Functionality
                                      TSFITSF Interface
                                      TSSTOE Summary Specification
                                      URIUniform Resource Identifier
                                      URLUniform Resource Locator
                                      USBUniversal Serial Bus
                                      VMVirtual Machine
                                      XCCDFeXtensible Configuration Checklist Description Format
                                      XORExclusive Or

                                      Appendix F - Bibliography

                                      Table 16: Bibliography
                                      IdentifierTitle
                                      [CC]Common Criteria for Information Technology Security Evaluation -
                                      [CEM]Common Methodology for Information Technology Security Evaluation -
                                      [CEM] Common Evaluation Methodology for Information Technology Security - Evaluation Methodology, CCMB-2012-09-004, Version 3.1, Revision 4, September 2012.
                                      [CESG]CESG - End User Devices Security and Configuration Guidance
                                      [CSA]Computer Security Act of 1987, H.R. 145, June 11, 1987.
                                      [OMB] Reporting Incidents Involving Personally Identifiable Information and Incorporating the Cost for Security in Agency Information Technology Investments, OMB M-06-19, July 12, 2006.